JP2024039683A - gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can easily handle cases where a predetermined signal different from existing signals is output to an external device. A prize ball payout signal based on the control process of a payout control microcomputer 116 is output from a payout control board 110 and input to an external terminal board 130, and a shooting stop detection signal based on detection of a shooting stop switch 115t is It is input to the external terminal board 130 via the payout control board 110. Since the signal input to the external terminal board 130 always passes through the payout control board 110, regardless of the source of the signal that triggers the output of the external signal to the external device 500, the signal input to the external terminal board 110 and the external terminal board 130 By connecting with the external device 500, external signals (prize ball information signal, firing stop signal) can be outputted to the external device 500. This makes it possible to easily accommodate a configuration in which the firing stop signal is output to the external device 500 as a signal different from existing signals. [Selection diagram] Figure 55

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (pinball gaming machines) and slot machines (spinning drum gaming machines).

Conventionally, gaming machines that play games using gaming media such as gaming balls and gaming medals have been known. This type of gaming machine is equipped with an external terminal board that is connected to an external device (for example, a hall computer) installed in the hall where the gaming machine is installed, and the signal input to the external terminal board is Based on this, various signals (information) regarding the gaming status and the like are output to an external device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217726

Gaming machines have specifications such as so-called 1 type, 2 type, 1 type and 2 mixed type, and general electric role type. In addition, the so-called type 1 type gaming machine has a pattern changing machine that determines whether or not to move to a variable probability gaming state based on the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed, and a pattern changing machine that determines whether or not to move to a variable probability gaming state based on the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed, and a pattern changing machine that determines whether or not to move to a variable probability gaming state based on the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. There are specifications such as a V-probability machine in which it is determined whether or not to shift to a probability-variable gaming state based on the presence or absence of the game. As described above, the specifications of gaming machines vary widely, and depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, it is possible to output a predetermined signal different from existing signals to an external device. In this case, it is desirable to be able to respond as simply as possible in the development and manufacturing process of the gaming machine.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can easily handle the case where a predetermined signal different from the existing signal is output to an external device.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention employs the following means.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
a main board provided with a control unit capable of executing control processing that affects the result of the game;
An external terminal board capable of outputting a predetermined external signal to an external device provided outside the gaming machine,
A gaming machine configured such that an external signal based on a signal input to the external terminal board is output from the external terminal board to the external device,
Equipped with a detection means capable of detecting a predetermined event,
The gist is that a signal based on control processing by the control unit and a signal based on detection by the detection means can be input to the external terminal board.

Note that the predetermined event is, for example, an event that occurs due to an artificial operation or action by a person who uses (plays) or manages a gaming machine (player, gaming hall clerk, etc.); Events that occur related to the configuration (structure) and operation of the gaming machine, such as events that occur due to the operation of the parts and devices included in the gaming machine, and events that occur as a result of the game process. It is an event whose presence or absence (occurrence or not) can be recognized (detected).

According to the present invention described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily handle the case where a predetermined signal different from an existing signal is output to an external device.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a back view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view showing the configuration of a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is a diagram showing displays included in the gaming machine. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine. This is a table showing the correspondence between types of jackpots and opening patterns of jackpots. It is a table showing various random numbers obtained by the game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (D) is a regular symbol variation pattern selection table. This is a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of main interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of starting port sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting pitch entry. It is a flowchart of normal figure movement processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol propriety determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of normal electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of special figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 propriety judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 propriety judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing (jackpot game). It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a flowchart of pending ball number processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of sub-control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating production start process. It is a flowchart of pending icon notice processing. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a variable performance unit (variable performance device). (A) is a diagram showing the display screen and the upright state (standby state) of the variable performance member during the variable performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the left variable performance member tilting from the upright state at the first gimmick notice during the variable performance. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing how the state changes. (A) is a diagram showing a state when the left variable performance member changes from a tilted state to an upright state at the first gimmick notice during a variable performance, and (B) is a diagram showing a list of preview display modes of the active hold icon. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the situation when the left variable performance member moves to the intermediate point position while in the upright state and the right variable performance member moves to the end point position while remaining in the upright state at the second gimmick notice during the variable performance. In (B), the left variable performance member changes from the upright state to the tilted state at the intermediate point position and the right variable performance member changes from the upright state to the tilted state at the end point position at the second gimmick notice during the variable performance. FIG. (A) is when the left variable performance member changes from the tilted state to the upright state at the intermediate point position and the right variable performance member changes from the tilted state to the upright state at the end point position in the second gimmick notice during the variable performance. It is a diagram showing the situation, and (B) is a diagram showing the situation when the SP reach effect is displayed after the second gimmick notice during the variable effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a list of preview images (notice display mode) displayed by the second gimmick preview. It is a figure which shows the structure of the variable effect member of Example 2, (A) is a figure which shows a non-operating state, and (B) is a figure which shows an operating state. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram of a main part of a sub-relay board according to a second embodiment. It is a flowchart of variable effect member initial operation processing of Example 2. It is a flowchart of variable production processing of Example 2. FIG. 7 is a front view of the firing handle of Example 3, (A) is a diagram showing the firing handle in a non-operating state, and (B) is a diagram showing the firing handle in the operating state. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment. 7 is a timing chart showing the states of various external signals in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of main parts of a dispensing control board and an external terminal board to which a firing stop detection signal is input according to the third embodiment. It is a principal part circuit diagram of the payout control board and external terminal board to which the frame opening detection signal of Example 3 is input. It is a flowchart of the prize ball payout monitoring process of Example 3. 12 is a flowchart of fraud monitoring processing according to the third embodiment.

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (pinball game machine) in which the game medium used for the game is a game ball, and the game can be advanced by firing the game ball toward the game board surface. Explain.

In the following description, the front side (front side) simply refers to the front side (front side) when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, and the side on which the player is positioned during gaming. In addition, simply the rear side (rear side) refers to the back side (back side) when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. Furthermore, simply the upper side (upper side), lower side (lower side), left side (left side), and right side (right side) refer to the upper, lower, left, and right directions when looking at the gaming machine from the front. , for example, refers to the upper side, lower side, left side, and right side in FIGS. 1 and 3.

The pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment performs a symbol variation game (also simply referred to as a "variation game") in which special symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole, and a jackpot is achieved as a result of the variation game. This is a so-called "DigiPachi type" pachinko game machine in which a jackpot game (special game) that awards a predetermined game value (for example, a prize ball) to the player can be executed when symbols are displayed (stopped).

[Basic configuration of pachinko machine 1]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 attached within the game machine frame 50. The game board 2 is configured to be detachable from the game machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the game board 2 is removed from the game machine frame 50.

The gaming machine frame 50 has a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 to which the gaming board 2 etc. are attached, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the island equipment of the gaming hall. It is configured. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52, and the outer frame 53 are each pivoted at one end of the pachinko game machine 1 (the left end in this embodiment) and are configured to be openable and closable. That is, the main body frame 52 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 53 so as to be openable and closable, and the front frame 51 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 52 so as to be openable and closable.

The front frame 51 includes a firing handle 60 for firing game balls with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the rotation operation part 60a, and a firing handle 60 that can store game balls and can supply the stored game balls to the firing device side. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 capable of storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61 are provided.

The front frame 51 includes a first performance button 63a and a second performance button 63b (these two performance buttons are collectively referred to as ), a decorative frame lamp 66 that can emit various lights depending on the gaming situation, and a decorative frame lamp 66 that can emit various sounds (sound effects) depending on the gaming situation. A speaker 67 and the like that can be used are also provided.

The production button 63 functions as an input means used when the player makes an input, and also functions as an operation means that can be operated by the player. A player or the like can selectively use (operate) a performance button (first performance button 63a or second performance button 63b) depending on the game situation, the type of game performance to be executed, etc. For example, when the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b is operated during execution of a game performance, a predetermined operation-corresponding performance is performed based on the operation. In this embodiment, a first effect button 63a is provided on the upper surface (top surface) of the upper plate 61 of the front frame 51, and a second effect button 63b is provided on the left front surface of the lower plate 62.

The first performance button 63a is configured as a movable operating means that can be operated in a predetermined operating mode. In this embodiment, the operating mode is vibration. The vibration of the first performance button 63a can be realized, for example, by configuring the first performance button 63a as a performance button unit (performance button device) including an eccentric motor (vibration motor) and driving the eccentric motor. . The first performance button 63a, which is configured to be actuated (vibrated) in this way, is a movable part for performance (also referred to as a "performance movable part") that is operably provided on the front side (front component) of the pachinko game machine 1. ).

The operating mode of the first effect button 63a is not limited to vibration, but may also be upward protrusion, rotation, etc., and may be selected based on the effect pattern from among multiple types of operation modes such as vibration, protrusion, and rotation. It may be possible to operate in a certain operating mode. Further, the second effect button 63b may also be configured to be operable in a predetermined operating mode.

Further, the configuration of the production button 63 is not limited to the aspect of this embodiment, and may be any configuration that allows the player to input, for example, it may be a lever type input means (operation means), It may be a contact-type input means (for example, a retractable type, a touch sensor type, etc.) in which the player inputs by directly touching the button part, or it may be a contact-type input means (for example, a retractable type, a touch sensor type, etc.), or a type of input means that detects when a part of the player's body approaches. A non-contact type input means (photoelectric type, etc.) that performs input may also be used.

On the game board 2, a game area 3 is formed surrounded by a rail member 4, into which game balls shot by operating a shooting handle 60 (rotating operation section 60a) flow down. The game board 2 (game area 3) is visible from the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1 through a window (visual window) provided in the front frame 51 (see FIG. 1).

A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are protruded in the game area 3, and a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4. The ball return prevention piece 6 is for preventing the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the firing device side. The game board 2 is also provided with a decorative board lamp 5 (see FIG. 5) that can emit various lights depending on the game situation.

An image display device 7 (effect display device, symbol display device) is provided near the center of the game board 2 (inside the game area). The image display device 7 is equipped with a liquid crystal display (liquid crystal display), and the display screen 7a is made visible from the front through an opening provided at approximately the center of the game board 2 (game area 3). It is provided on the back side of the game board 2.

A display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with a performance pattern display area 7b (also referred to as a "performance pattern display section") in which a performance pattern 8 is displayed. The production pattern 8 is composed of three symbols: a left production pattern 8L, a middle production pattern 8C, and a right production pattern 8R, and is displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol described later, and in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. to display a stop display. Examples of the variable display mode include scroll display in up and down, left and right, diagonal directions, and the like. Any or all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be simply referred to as "performance symbols 8."

The effect pattern display area 7b consists of three pattern display areas: "left," "middle," and "right." The left effect pattern 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area, and the middle effect pattern is displayed in the middle pattern display area. 8C is displayed, and the right production symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. In addition, the positions of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas do not need to be provided separately, and the display areas for the left, middle, and right production symbols may each be used as the entire symbol display area (production symbol display area 7b). .

The effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of this embodiment each consist of numerical patterns from "1" to "9" (identification information type, pattern type), and these numerical patterns are displayed in order. ing. Specifically, the variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed by scrolling and displaying the production pattern in the order of "1" → "2" ... "8" → "9" (ascending order). When it reaches "9", it returns to "1" and the scrolling display is repeated until the end of the variation (stop display).

In this embodiment, each of the symbols "1" to "9" that make up the performance symbol 8 contains color information, and each symbol can be classified by color. Specifically, the odd symbols "3" and "7" are red symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "red symbols"), and the other odd symbols "1", "5", and "9" are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "green symbols"). Additionally, the even symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "blue symbols").

Depending on the combination (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right performance symbols displayed (stop display) in the performance symbol display area 7b, a first special symbol display 41a (also referred to as a "first special symbol display section"), which will be described later, is displayed. ), and the result of the variable display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display section"). That is, the result of the special symbol validity determination (also simply referred to as "validity determination") is displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize. In this embodiment, the order in which the three variablely displayed performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (stopping order) is basically "left → right → middle." That is, the first stop symbol in the stop order is the left effect symbol 8L, the second stop symbol in the stop order is the right effect symbol 8R, and the third (last) stop symbol in the stop order is the middle effect symbol 8C. . Furthermore, the stopped symbol that is first in the stopping order is also referred to as the "first stopped symbol", the stopped symbol that is second in the stopping order is also referred to as the "second stopped symbol", and the stopped symbol that is the third in the stopping order. This is also called the "third stop symbol" or "final stop symbol."

Here, either or both of the special design and production design are simply referred to as "design" or "identification information", and the normal design is also referred to as "common design" or "normal identification information", and the special design This is also called a "special pattern", "special identification information" or "first identification information", and the first special pattern is also called "special pattern 1", "first special pattern" or "first special identification information". The second special symbol is also referred to as "special symbol 2," "second special symbol," or "second special identification information," and the production symbol is also referred to as "production identification information" or "second identification information." say.

In addition, a first special symbol display 41a (described later) that displays a first special symbol, a second special symbol display 41b (described later) that displays a second special symbol, and a main control unit (described later) that performs control related to the display of special symbols. 80 (gaming control microcomputer 81) is also referred to as "special identification information display means" or "first identification information display means"; At least one of the sub-control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for performance control) and image control unit 100 (microcomputer 101 for image control), which will be described later, which controls the display of the performance symbols 8, is referred to as "performance identification information display means" or It is also referred to as "second identification information display means." Furthermore, the image display device 7, the first special symbol display 41a, and the second special symbol display 41b are also referred to as "identification information display means" or "design display means", or simply as "display means".

The stop display mode of the effect pattern 8 can be determined as follows. For example, if the result of the special symbol validity determination is a jackpot, the performance symbol 8 can be stopped and displayed in the same three-digit symbol arrangement such as "222" or "777" (so-called "double number"), and the special symbol validity is determined. If the result of the judgment is negative, the production pattern 8 is stopped and displayed in a pattern arrangement in which at least one of the three patterns such as "637" and "373" is different from the other patterns (so-called "barakame"). I can do it. A symbol arrangement with the same three digits (Zero) is also called a "winning symbol arrangement", and a symbol arrangement in which at least one symbol is different from the other symbols (Rose") is also called a "missing symbol arrangement". There are a plurality of types of symbol arrays (stop display modes) in the winning symbol array and the losing symbol array, respectively. In addition, when the result of the special symbol validity determination is a jackpot, the effect pattern 8 can be stopped and displayed in a stop display mode other than zero or zero depending on the type of jackpot.

By looking at the effect symbols 8 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game. In other words, the player generally does not directly understand the result of the special symbol validity determination by looking at the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather on the display. The user sees and understands the effect pattern 8 displayed on the screen 7a (effect pattern display area 7b). A game performance using such performance symbols 8 can be said to be a performance (also referred to as a "notification performance") that notifies the player of the result of the special symbol validity determination. A game performance (notification performance) using the performance pattern 8 is also referred to as a ``performance pattern game performance'', and a performance in which the performance pattern 8 is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped (determined display) is also referred to as a ``fluctuating performance''.

Here, among the results of the special symbol validity determination, a "jackpot" is also referred to as a "specific result," and a "miss" is also referred to as a "non-specific result." In addition, the display mode (stop display mode) of the special symbol corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol validity determination is a "jackpot" is also referred to as the "specific display format" or "specific display result", and the result of the special symbol validity determination. The display mode (stop display mode) of the special symbol that corresponds to the case where is a "miss" is also referred to as the "non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result", and when the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a "jackpot" The display mode (winning pattern arrangement) of the production pattern 8 corresponding to the above is also referred to as a "special display mode" or "special display result", and when the result of the special symbol validity judgment is "miss", the display mode of the production pattern 8 corresponding to The display mode (missing symbol arrangement) is also referred to as a "non-special display mode" or "non-special display result." Furthermore, the variable display of special symbols and/or production symbols that is executed based on the result of special symbol validity determination being a jackpot is also referred to as "jackpot variation" or "specific variation", and the result of special symbol validity determination is The variable display of special symbols and/or performance symbols executed based on the fact that the symbol is a miss is also referred to as a "miss variation" or "non-specific variation."

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying game effects (effect pattern game effects, notification effects, variable effects) using the effect patterns 8 as described above, a jackpot game executed in conjunction with the jackpot game is displayed. Various performance displays such as performances (special game performances) and demonstration performances for waiting for customers are displayed. Performance Symbols In game performances, jackpot game performances, and demonstration performances, in addition to performance symbols such as numbers, various images other than performance symbols (performance images) such as background images and character images are also displayed.

Furthermore, in the demonstration performance, a performance setting screen (not shown) can be displayed. The performance setting screen includes settings for the game machine, such as the volume of sound effects, the brightness of the display screen 7a, the brightness of illumination members such as the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66, background display, and execution conditions for the preview performance. This is a screen for the player to make settings regarding the performance. While waiting for a customer to perform a demonstration performance, the player operates the performance button or other operation means (for example, a control lever or cross key) to display a performance setting screen on the display screen 7a, and performs the performance. By operating the effect buttons and the like according to the contents of the setting screen, it is possible to arbitrarily perform various settings regarding the effect (so-called "customization").

The display screen 7a is provided with a determination symbol display area 7c in which a determination symbol 8s indicating (notifying) the result of special symbol propriety determination is displayed in addition to the production symbol 8 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a determination symbol display area 7c is provided at the upper right of the effect symbol display area 7b (upper right of the display screen 7a) (see FIG. 3). The size of the determination symbol display area 7c is smaller than the production symbol display region 7b, and accordingly, the size of the determination symbol 8s is also smaller than the production symbol 8. The determination symbol 8s is also referred to as a "small symbol" or "small identification information."

Similar to the production pattern 8, the judgment pattern 8s is composed of three patterns: a left judgment pattern 8sL, a middle judgment pattern 8sC, and a right judgment pattern 8sR, and is displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol described later. The stop display is performed in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. The manner in which the determination symbol 8s is displayed in a variable manner includes, for example, a manner in which it is scrolled in the vertical or horizontal direction, a manner in which it is displayed in rotation in the vertical or horizontal direction, and the like. Any or all of the left determination symbol 8sL, the middle determination symbol 8sC, and the right determination symbol 8sR are also simply referred to as "determination symbol 8s."

Also in the determination symbol display area 7c, the result of the special symbol validity determination is displayed by the combination (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right determination symbols 8s. In other words, the determination symbol 8s is displayed variably and then stopped based on the result of the special symbol validity determination. In this embodiment, the determination symbol 8s is displayed in the same stop display mode (symbol arrangement) as the stop display mode (symbol arrangement, confirmed stop symbol) of the production symbol 8 displayed in the production symbol display area 7b. There is. However, the stopping order like the production pattern 8 is not determined, and the three judgment patterns 8sL, 8sC, and 8sR start variable display all at once with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and stop the special symbol. The display is configured to stop and display all at once.

In addition, the stop display mode may be made different between the production pattern 8 and the judgment pattern 8s. In addition, the stop display mode (hit pattern arrangement) when the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a jackpot is the same for the production pattern 8 and the judgment pattern 8s, and the stop display mode (missing pattern arrangement) when it is a miss is the production pattern 8. and the judgment pattern 8s may be made different. When the stop display mode (missing pattern arrangement) in the case of a loss is made different between the production pattern 8 and the judgment pattern 8s, the judgment pattern 8s can have only one type of deviation pattern arrangement (for example, "246" etc.). This is because the player mainly sees the performance symbols 8 to grasp the result of the success/failure judgment (hit or miss), so there is little need to provide a plurality of types of missed symbol arrays for the determination symbol 8s, similarly to the performance symbol 8. In addition, the results of special symbol validity judgment (results of variable games) performed during the game progress are almost always misses when considering the jackpot probability. , it becomes possible to improve the efficiency and simplification of symbol display control.

The reason why the judgment symbol 8s is displayed (the judgment symbol display area 7c is provided) is, for example, when a performance image that arouses the player's expectations for a jackpot, such as a preview performance or a super reach performance, which will be described later, is displayed on the display screen while a variable performance is being executed. When displayed on almost the entire area of 7a, the performance pattern 8 may be hidden by the performance image, or the performance pattern 8 may be hidden (erased), or otherwise become invisible. Because there is. In other words, even if the production pattern 8 is not visible (not displayed), it is possible to understand through the judgment pattern 8s that the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner or has been stopped (determined stop). ing. For this reason, the determination symbol 8 is always displayed in a gaming state (also referred to as a "variable gaming state") in which a variable game can be executed.

Note that the determination symbols 8s of this embodiment are not distinguished by color like the performance symbols 8, and are displayed in the same color regardless of the number (design type). In this embodiment, the color (display color) of the determination pattern 8s is "gray", which is an intermediate color between white and black. The determination symbol 8s is a relatively inconspicuous gray (neutral color) because the determination symbol 8s is a symbol that the player mainly sees in order to grasp the result of the special symbol validity determination (that is, the result of the special symbol validity determination is used in the game). This is because it does not function as a pattern to notify the user, but mainly as a pattern that indicates the fluctuation status of the special pattern, and there is no need to make it stand out like the production pattern 8. Moreover, by setting the color (display color) of the determination symbol 8s to be one color, it is possible to improve the efficiency and simplify the symbol display control. However, the determination pattern 8s may also include color information in the same manner as the performance pattern 8, and may be color-coded in the same manner as the performance pattern 8 or different in color.

In addition, the display screen 7a includes a first effect holding display area 9c (first effect holding display section) that displays a first effect holding 9a according to the number of stored first special drawings to be described later, and a second effect holding display area to be described later. A second performance pending display area 9d (second performance pending display section) is provided that displays a second performance pending display area 9b according to the number of stored figures. In this embodiment, a first performance pending display area 9c and a second performance pending display area 9d are provided below the performance symbol display area 7b (at the bottom of the display screen 7a) (see FIG. 3). Depending on the display mode (display number) of the first performance hold and second performance hold, the number of stored first special figure holds displayed on the first special figure hold display 43a, which will be described later, and the second special figure hold display 43b. It is possible to clearly show the number of stored second special drawings displayed to the player.

Here, the first performance reservation 9a displayed in the first performance reservation display area 9c is also referred to as a "first reservation icon" or "first storage information", and the first performance reservation 9a displayed in the second performance reservation display area 9d The second performance hold 9b is also referred to as a "second hold icon" or "second storage information", and either or both of the first performance hold 9a and the second performance hold 9b are referred to as a "hold icon" or "memory information". Also called "information." Also. The first performance pending display area 9c is also referred to as a "first storage information display section" or "first storage information display means", and the second performance pending display area 9d is also referred to as a "second storage information display section" or " It is also referred to as "second storage information display means", and either one or both of the first performance reservation display area 9c and the second performance reservation display area 9d is also referred to as a "memory information display section" or "memorization information display means".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the display screen 7a shows the effect pending corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) currently being displayed in a variable manner, that is, corresponding to the expired special symbol pending. A variable pending display area 9e for displaying performance pending (first performance pending 9a or second performance pending 9b) is provided (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a variable pending display area 9e is provided on the left side of the first performance pending display area 9c and the second performance pending display area 9d.

The first performance reservation 9a displayed in the first performance reservation display area 9c is the special figure 1 reservation ball number "1", "2", "3", "4" in order from the left end to the right end of the display area 9c. ”, and the second performance reservation 9b displayed in the second performance reservation display area 9d is the special figure 2 reservation ball number “1”, in order from the left end to the right end of the display area 9d, It corresponds to "2", "3", and "4". Therefore, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls "1" (expiration of the first special figure reservation), the first effect reservation 9a (the first The first performance hold 9a) displayed at the left end of the performance hold display area 9c moves (is moved and displayed) from the first performance hold display area 9c to the variable hold display area 9e. In addition, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls "1" (expiration of the second special figure reservation), the second performance reservation 9b (second performance The second performance hold 9b) displayed at the left end of the hold display area 9d moves (is moved and displayed) from the second performance hold display area 9d to the variable hold display area 9e. In addition, if a game ball enters the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21) and the special pattern fluctuation display starts when the number of special symbols reserved balls is "0", the fluctuation A performance hold (first performance hold 9a or second performance hold 9b) is displayed in the variable hold display area 9e in conjunction with the starting ball entry which is the trigger for the start of the display (variable game).

Here, the variable pending display area 9e can also be referred to as a "memory information display section" or "memory information display means", and the effect pending displayed in the variable pending display area 9e can also be referred to as "memory information" or a "pending icon". I can do it. In addition, the effect pending displayed in the variable pending display area 9e is also referred to as "fluctuating storage information," "fluctuating pending icon," or "active pending icon," and the effect pending ( The hold icon) and the performance hold (active hold icon) displayed in the variable hold display area 9e are also collectively referred to as "memory information" or "hold icon." Further, the performance pending display areas 9c and 9d and the variable pending display area 9e, which can display the performance pending 9a and 9b, are also referred to as "performance pending display section" or "performance pending display means."

As described above, the display screen 7a (image display device 7) capable of displaying various effect displays and effect images is also referred to as a "effect display section" or "effect display means." In addition, performances (displays) performed by being displayed on the display screen 7a, such as game performances using the performance symbols 8 (production symbol game performances, notification performances, variable performances), jackpot game performances, demonstration performances, and preview performances described below. The effects performed on the screen are also called ``display effects''.

Near the center of the game board 2 (game area 3) and in front of the image display device 7 (display means), a center decoration body 10 (so-called "center accessory") is provided so as to surround the display screen 7a. ing. The center decoration body 10 is constructed from a molded plastic (resin) product, and is attached to the surface (front surface) of the game board 2 as a frame-shaped part (board part) with an open center. . The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is made visible through the central opening of the center decorative body 10.

A stage part 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll is provided at the lower part of the center decoration body 10, and a hollow warp part 12 is provided at the left part of the center decoration body 10. It is being The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, and by receiving a game ball flowing down the game area 3 (left game area 3A) from the warp entrance and discharging it from the warp exit, the game ball is placed on a stage. Guide to section 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage part 11 can enter the first starting port 20, which will be described later, with a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage part 11. In addition, the upper part of the center decoration body 10 is equipped with an illumination member (board lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on or off according to the game state, and is a decorative member in the shape of letters, figures, etc. 13 are provided.

On the left side of the center opening of the center decoration body 10, a left cover member 17L that can cover a left variable effect member 14L, which will be described later, from the front (front side) is provided, and on the right side of the center opening of the center decoration body 10, a left cover member 17L is provided. A right cover member 17R is provided that can cover a right variable presentation member 14R, which will be described later, from the front (front side). Either or both of the left variable performance member 14L and the right variable performance member 14R is also referred to as a "variable performance member" (variable performance member 14), and either or both of the left cover member 17L and the right cover member 17R. It is also referred to as a "cover member" (cover member 17).

The cover member 17 is provided integrally with the center decoration body 10, and is configured to be opaque or otherwise made so that it is difficult (impossible) to view the rear (back side) thereof through the cover member 17. ing.

Between the game board 2 and the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) arranged behind the game board 2, there is a variable performance unit 140 (variable performance device), which will be described later, and which includes a variable performance member 14. is provided (see FIG. 44). Thereby, the variable effect member 14 is located between the display screen 7a and the cover member 17 (on the front side of the display screen 7a).

The variable performance member 14 of this embodiment is constituted by a shaped object with a flag as a motif, and includes a flag portion 14a (flag portions 14aL, 14aR). As shown in FIG. 3, this variable effect member 14 is normally located at a starting point position (also referred to as an "initial position" or "standby position") set on the stage section 11 side (lower side of the center decorative body 10). It is in a state where it is standing straight vertically (also referred to as a "standing state"). The state in which the variable effect member 14 is at the starting position and in the upright state is also referred to as a "non-operating state" or a "standby state."

The variable effect member 14 can move vertically (up and down) between the starting point and the ending point behind the cover member 17 (on the back side), and can move left and right at a predetermined position within its movement range. It is possible to rotate in any direction. That is, the left variable performance member 14L can move vertically between the starting point and the ending point behind the left cover member 17L (on the back side), and can also stand up and move at a predetermined position within its movement range. It is possible to rotate between this state and a state in which it is tilted approximately 90 degrees to the right (towards the center of the display screen 7a) (also referred to as a "tilted state"). In addition, the right variable performance member 14R can move vertically between the starting point and the ending point at the rear (back side) of the right cover member 17R, and can also stand up at a predetermined position within its movement range. It is possible to rotate between this state and a state (tilted state) in which it is tilted approximately 90 degrees to the left (towards the center of the display screen 7a).

In this embodiment, when the variable effect member 14 is in the upright state, the entire variable effect member 14 is hidden behind the cover member 17. Therefore, it is difficult (substantially impossible) to visually recognize the variable effect member 14 from the front unless you look into the space (gap) between the cover member 17 and the display screen 7a. Therefore, normally, the variable performance member 14 in the upright state cannot be seen by a player who is playing a game while watching the display screen 7a. For example, when the variable performance member 14 rotates in accordance with the execution of a game performance with a relatively high possibility of winning a jackpot, the variable performance member 14 hidden in the cover member 17 appears, and the variable performance member 14 The flag portion 14a becomes visible from the front. This increases the player's expectation of winning the jackpot. Details of the variable performance member 14 (variable performance unit 140) will be described later.

Here, the variable performance member 14 corresponds to a so-called "gimmick", and the performance of operating the variable performance member 14 corresponds to a "gimmick performance". The performance (gimmick performance) that operates the variable performance member 14 is also referred to as "variable performance" or "movable performance", and the variable performance member 14 (gimmick) is also referred to as "variable performance means" or "movable performance means". . In addition to the variable performance member 14, for example, when the performance button 63 vibrates or the like with a game performance, the performance that activates the performance button 63 can also be referred to as a "variable performance" or "movable performance", and the performance button 63 can also be called "variable presentation means" or "movable presentation means."

Further, a performance in which various sounds (sound effects) are generated (outputted) from the speaker 67 according to the game situation is also referred to as a sound performance, and the speaker 67 is also referred to as a "sound performance means". In addition, the effect that causes the board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, decorative member 13, etc. to emit light according to the game situation is also called a "light effect", and the effect that the board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, decorative member 13, etc. Also called "light production means". In addition to the board lamps 5, for example, the performance button 63 and the firing handle 60 have built-in illumination members such as LEDs, and when the illumination members light up or blink depending on the game situation due to the action of the illumination members. The effect of making the effect button 63 and the firing handle 60 emit light can also be called a "light effect", and the effect button 63 and the emission handle 60 with built-in illumination members can also be called a "light effect means". . The "display effect means", the "variable effect means", the "sound effect means", and the "light effect means" are also collectively referred to as the "presentation means."

Below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3 (below the stage section 11) is a non-variable first starting port 20 ("non-variable A fixed winning device 19 is provided, which is also referred to as a "starting port" or a "fixed starting port." Random numbers etc. for special symbol validity determination are acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and when a predetermined condition is established, the validity determination regarding the first special symbol (first special symbol validity determination) is obtained. ) is executed, and a variable display and a stop display of the first special symbol are executed based on the result of the hit/fail judgment.

Below the first starting opening 20, a variable prize winning device is provided with a variable second starting opening 21 (also referred to as a "variable starting opening") in which the ease of entry of game balls (possibility of ball entry) changes. 22 are provided. The variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) is normally provided as an electric accessory.

A random number etc. for special symbol validity determination is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and when a predetermined condition is established, the validity determination of the second special symbol is determined (second special symbol validity determination). is executed, and a variable display of the second special symbol is executed and displayed based on the result of the hit/fail judgment.

The variable prize winning device 22 includes a movable member 23, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening/closing operation, the second starting port 21 can change between the first mode (closed state) and the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that of the first mode. It is. That is, the movable member 23 changes the possibility of the game ball entering the second starting port 21 by performing a predetermined operation (opening/closing operation). This movable member 23 is driven by a second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In this embodiment, a game ball can enter the second starting port 21 only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and a game ball cannot enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. . In addition, if the second starting port 21 is such that it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when it is in the open state, the second starting port 21 is completely opened when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

On the right side of the first starting opening 20 in the gaming area 3, a big winning device 31 is provided which includes a big winning opening 30 (also referred to as a "special ball entrance" or "variable ball entrance"). This big winning device 31 (big winning opening 30) is provided as a special electric accessory.

The big winning device 31 includes an opening/closing member 32, and opens and closes the big winning opening 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a big prize opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). A game ball can enter the grand prize opening 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the big winning device 31 changes between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which game balls cannot enter and a ball entry possible state (open state) in which game balls can enter, by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 32. It is possible.

In the right side area of the game area 3, a gate 28 (passage opening) through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining the validity of the normal symbol is obtained, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a normal control is performed to determine whether or not to open the second starting port 21. As the pattern validity determination is executed, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and are stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol validity determination. When the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second starting port 21 becomes open.

In the lower area of the gaming area 3, a plurality of general winning holes 27 are provided. The first starting hole 20, the second starting hole 21, the big winning hole 30, and the general winning hole 27 are ball entry holes that trigger the payout of prize balls, and when a game ball enters each ball entry hole, A predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) are paid out at each ball entrance. For example, the number of prize balls for the first starting opening 20 is "5", the number of prize balls for the second starting opening 21 is "3", the number of prize balls for the grand prize opening 30 is "15", and the number of prize balls for the general winning opening 27 is "3". The number is assumed to be "10".

In this way, the gaming area 3 where a plurality of ball entrance openings (first starting opening 20, second starting opening 21, big winning opening 30, general winning opening 27, gate 28) etc. are arranged is located from the center in the left and right direction. It can be divided into a left gaming area 3A (first area) on the left side and a right gaming area 3B (second area) on the right side. Firing a game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A is also called "left-handed hitting," and firing a game ball so that it flows down the right gaming area 3B is also called "right-handed hitting." say.

Among the plurality of ball entry ports, the first starting port 20 and the left general prize winning port 27 are provided so that game balls flowing down the left gaming area 3A of the gaming area 3 can enter therein. The opening 21, the big winning opening 30, the right general winning opening 27, and the gate 28 are provided so that game balls flowing down the right gaming area 3B of the gaming area 3 can enter. For this reason, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when starting a game, in principle, the player aims to hit the ball to the left into the first starting hole 20. On the other hand, when the game state changes to a special game state due to a jackpot in the judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, as a general rule, if the player hits the right ball, the ball enters the gate 28, the second starting port 21, and the big winning port. The goal is to hit the ball in the 30th. Note that the number of starting holes, big winning holes, general winning holes, and gates is not limited to this example. The number of gates to be installed is arbitrary, such as four gates or two gates.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is provided outside the game area 3 (outside the game area) and at the lower right of the game board 2. The main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section) that variably displays and stops displaying a first special symbol, and a second special symbol that variably displays and stops displaying a second special symbol. Display device 41b (second special symbol display section), normal symbol display device 42 (normal symbol display section) that fluctuates and displays normal symbols, and validity judgment information related to the first special symbol (first special symbol pending). ), a second special pattern holding display 43b that displays the number of pieces of validity judgment information (second special pattern holding) stored, and a second special pattern holding display 43b displaying the number of pieces of validity judgment information (second special pattern holding) related to the second special pattern; A general pattern holding display 44 that displays the memory number of operation hold (normal pattern holding) of the pattern display 42 and a jackpot that is executed when the result of the first special symbol validity determination or the second special symbol validity determination is a jackpot. A round indicator 45 that indicates the number of rounds of the game, a game status indicator 46 that indicates that the probability variation function is activated, and a firing direction that indicates the direction in which the game ball is launched (whether it should be hit to the left or right). It includes a direction indicator 47 and a hit indicator 48 which indicates that the result of the first special symbol validity determination or the second special symbol validity determination is a hit (see FIG. 4). These various indicators included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main control section 80, which will be described later.

Note that the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are collectively referred to as a "special symbol display" or "special symbol". The first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as a ``special figure holding display'' or a ``special figure holding display.''

In the special symbol display section, a special symbol (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, and then is displayed in a stopped state. The results of the lottery (special symbol validity judgment, jackpot lottery) based on the above information will be announced. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. will be carried out. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols based on the special symbol appropriateness determination. If the stopping symbol is a predetermined jackpot symbol (specific special symbol, specific identification information), that is, the stopping display mode of the special symbol (the display result of the variable display of the special symbol) is the specific display mode (specific display result) that indicates a jackpot. ), a transition is made to a jackpot game state (special game state) in which a jackpot game (special game) is executed in which the jackpot game (special game) is performed in which the jackpot opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. . The opening pattern of the jackpot opening in the jackpot game will be described later.

The stop display of the special symbol is performed until a predetermined stop display time (determined display time) elapses. Then, if the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is a missing symbol (missing pattern, non-specific pattern), and special pattern reservation is stored at the time of the stop display, when the stop display time has elapsed, the memory order The oldest (earliest) special symbol reservation is consumed, and the variable display of the next special symbol is thereby started. In addition, if the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is a missed symbol and special symbol hold is not stored at the time of the stop display, the stop display state of the special symbol will be maintained even after the stop display time has elapsed. be done. On the other hand, if the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol, when the stop display time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game, which will be described later, will begin, and after the opening period, the first round of the jackpot game will start. .

The stop display time of the special symbol is generally set to "0.5 seconds to 1.0 seconds", and in this embodiment, it is set to "0.6 seconds". In addition, the stop display time when the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is a winning symbol (missing stop display time) is different from the stop display time when the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol (jackpot stop display time). In this case, the jackpot stop display time can be made longer than the winning stop display time, or the winning stop display time can be made longer than the jackpot stop display time. Further, the stop display time may be varied depending on the game state such as a low base state or a high base state, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "i to p", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol validity determination. In this example, the results of the first special symbol validity determination are "10R 1st jackpot", "10R 2nd jackpot", "10R 3rd jackpot", "10R 4th jackpot", "10R 5th jackpot", " There are seven types of jackpots, ``5R 6th jackpot'' and ``5R 7th jackpot'' (see Figures 6 and 8), and the LED of the first special symbol display 41a indicates each of these seven types of jackpots. It is possible to display a display mode (specific display mode, specific display result) depending on the situation. For example, if the result of the first special symbol judgment is 10R first jackpot, two LEDs of "ij" will be lit and the rest will be turned off (10R first jackpot symbol), and if the result is 10R second jackpot, " In case of 10R 3rd jackpot, turn on 2 LEDs of ``in'' and turn off the rest (10R 3rd jackpot symbol), turn on 2 LEDs of ``im'' and turn off the rest (10R 3rd jackpot symbol). Various jackpot symbols (specific display modes, specific display results) are displayed by combinations of lighting and extinguishing of the plurality of LEDs constituting the first special symbol display 41a. Further, if the result of the first special symbol validity determination is a failure, one LED of "p" is turned on and the rest are turned off (a failure symbol).

On the other hand, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol validity determination. In this embodiment, two types of jackpots, "10R 8th jackpot" and "10R 9th jackpot" are provided as a result of the second special symbol correctness determination (see FIGS. 6 and 8), and the second special The LED of the symbol display 41b can take a display mode (specific mode, specific display result) depending on each of the two types of jackpots. For example, if the result of the second special symbol judgment is the 10R 8th jackpot, three LEDs of "abd" will be lit and the rest will be turned off (10R 8th jackpot symbol), and if the result is the 10R 9th jackpot, " Various jackpot symbols (specific display mode, specific display results). In addition, in the case of a miss, one LED of "h" is turned on and the rest are turned off (missing symbol).

Note that the stop display mode of the special symbols (stop symbols) and the types of jackpots (types of number of rounds, number of jackpots, etc.) are not limited to these, and can be set arbitrarily.

Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. The manner in which the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner may be, for example, a manner in which each LED lights up so that light repeatedly flows in a predetermined order, such as in a clockwise direction or a counterclockwise direction. In addition, the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a is maintained in its stop display mode until the above-mentioned stop display time has elapsed, and when the stop display time has elapsed, the next variable display is started. Ru. Similarly, the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b is maintained in its stopped display mode until the above-mentioned stop display time has elapsed, and when the stop display time has elapsed, the next variable display starts. be done. If the next variable display is not started, the stopped display mode is maintained even if the stopped display time elapses.

In this pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various information such as a random number for determining the validity of a special symbol ("acquired information") is based on the entering of the ball. ) is obtained (obtaining means), and the obtained various information is temporarily stored in a special figure reservation storage section (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control section 80. Specifically, if the ball enters the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special pattern holding storage unit (not shown) as the first special pattern pending, and if the ball enters the second starting port 21, it is stored as the first special pattern pending. It is stored in a second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown) as a second special figure reservation. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations (obtained information) that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage section, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is "4". These first special figure reservation storage section and second special figure reservation storage section are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and collectively as "acquisition information storage means". . Further, the obtained information storage means is also simply referred to as "storage means."

The special symbol reservation stored in the special symbol reservation storage section is consumed when the special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner based on the special symbol reservation. Extinguishing the special symbol reservation means determining the special symbol propriety judgment random number etc. corresponding to the special symbol reservation, and executing a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko game machine 1, if the special symbol variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately upon entry, that is, the special symbol variation display Even when a display is being executed or a special game is being executed, it is possible to reserve the right to judge the validity of special symbols for the entered ball up to a predetermined number (4 in this example). There is.

The number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure reservation storage section is displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation display 43a is composed of two LEDs "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of first special figures reserved, the first special figure It displays the number of pending items. For example, when the number of reservations is "0", both LEDs are turned off, such as "u□v□" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of reservations is When is "1", the display format is "u□v●", where the "u" LED is turned off and the "v" LED is lit in red, and when the number of reservations is "2", "u● v The display mode may be such that both LEDs are lit in red, and when the number of reservations is "4 (upper limit number)", both LEDs may be lit in green, such as "u▲v▲".

In addition, the second special figure holding display 43b is composed of two LEDs "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figures holding, the number of second special figures holding is displayed. For example, if the number of reservations is "0", the display format is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w□x□" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of reservations is "1" to "4" are also defined in the same way as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

In addition, similarly to the above-mentioned first performance pending display area 9c and second performance pending display area 9d, the first special figure pending display 43a is also referred to as a "first storage information display section" or "first storage information display means". '', and the second special figure holding display 43b can be referred to as a ``second storage information display section'' or ``second storage information display means'', and the first special figure holding display 43a and the second Either or both of the special figure reservation indicators 43b can be referred to as a "stored information display section" or "stored information display means."

The fluctuating display of the normal symbols is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display device 42 displays the normal symbols in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, then stops displaying them, and uses the stopped and displayed normal symbols (stopped symbols) to notify the result of the normal symbol validity determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. do. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol validity determination. When the stopped and displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (winning normal symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs "st", and depending on the lighting mode, it is possible to display a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol validity determination. ing. For example, if the determination result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit is stopped and displayed, such as "s■t■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). If the determination result is a failure, a failure normal symbol (non-specific normal symbol) such as ``s□t■'' in which only the "t" LED is lit is displayed. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbols is executed for a predetermined variable time. The mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs alternately turn on and off. Further, the normal symbols stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42 are maintained in the stopped display mode until the stop display time has elapsed, and when the stop display time has elapsed, the next variable display is started. If the next variable display is not started, the stopped display mode is maintained even if the stopped display time has elapsed.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as a random number for determining the validity of normal symbols is acquired based on the passing of the game ball. The various kinds of information are temporarily stored as a general pattern reservation in a general pattern reservation storage section (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control section 80. An upper limit is set for the number of common symbols that can be stored in the common symbol reservation storage unit, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is "4". The regular symbol reservation stored in the regular symbol reservation storage unit is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary symbol reservation becomes possible. The extinguishing of a normal symbol reservation means to determine the random number for normal symbol propriety determination corresponding to the ordinary symbol reservation, and to execute a fluctuating display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the fluctuating display of the normal symbols based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, that is, when the fluctuating display of the regular symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. Even in the case of the above, it is possible to reserve the right to judge whether the normal symbols are correct or not for the passing of the symbols, with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

The number of common symbols stored in the common symbol reservation storage section is displayed on the common symbol reservation display 44. Specifically, the Fuzuzu reservation display 44 is composed of two LEDs "qr", and displays the number of Fuzuzu reservations by lighting up the LEDs according to the number of Fuzuzu reservations. be. For example, if the number of reservations is "0", the display format is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q□r□" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on), and the number of pending When is "1", the display mode can be such that the "q" LED is turned off and the "r" LED is lit in red, such as "q□r●". Further, the number of reservations "2" to "4" is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

As shown in FIG. 4, the round indicator 45 is composed of two LEDs: a 5R lamp and a 10R lamp. In the round display 45, for example, when a 5R jackpot occurs, a 5R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is like "5▲10R△" (for example, △: off, ▲: on). Furthermore, when a 10R jackpot is reached, the 10R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is like "5△10R▲" (for example, △: off, ▲: on).

[Configuration of variable production unit]
Next, the configuration of the variable presentation unit 140 (variable presentation device) of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 44. As shown in the figure, the variable effect unit 140 mainly includes a substantially square-shaped frame 141 with an open center, a variable effect member 14 assembled to the frame 141, and a drive means (for operating the variable effect member 14). (see FIG. 5) and a motor (not shown). This variable performance unit 140 is assembled to the rear (back side) of the game board 2 via a mounting base (not shown) by screwing or the like. The image display device 7 (liquid crystal display) is mounted on the back surface (rear side) of the variable production unit 140 via a mounting base (not shown), with its display screen 7a facing the opening A of the frame 141, and fixed with screws, etc. It is assembled by

The frame 141 of the variable effect unit 140 assembled on the rear (back side) of the game board 2 is hidden behind the game board 2, the center decoration 10, the cover member 17, etc., and is not exposed to the outside, so that it is not visible to the player. is not visible (from the front). Since the opening A of the frame 141 overlaps with the central opening of the center decorative body 10, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be viewed from the front through the respective openings of the center decorative body 10 and the frame 141. (See Figure 3).

As shown in FIG. 44, guide holes 142L and 142R (a pair of left and right guide holes) extending in the vertical direction are provided on two left and right sides of the four sides, top, bottom, left and right, of the frame 141, respectively. In the guide hole 142L, a shaft 143L that supports the left variable effect member 14L is movably arranged along the guide hole 142L, and in the guide hole 142R, a shaft 143R that supports the right variable effect member 14R is disposed. It is disposed so as to be movable along the guide hole 142R. The shaft bodies 143L, 143R are both provided facing in the front-rear direction. Either or both of the guide hole 142L and the guide hole 142R is also referred to as a "guide hole" (guide hole 142).

The variable performance unit 140 includes a first motor (not shown) that moves the left variable performance member 14L up and down, which serves as a motor (driving means) for operating the left variable performance member 14L, and a first motor (not shown) that rotates the left variable performance member 14L. and a third motor (not shown) that moves the right variable performance member 14R up and down as a motor (drive means) that operates the right variable performance member 14R; It includes a fourth motor (not shown) that rotates the right variable effect member 14R. All of these four motors can be stepping motors.

By driving the first motor (forward rotation drive or reverse rotation drive), the shaft body 143L moves in the vertical direction along the guide hole 142L, and the left variable effect member 14L moves up and down accordingly. Thereby, the left variable performance member 14L can be displaced within the vertical movement range allowed by the guide hole 142L. Inside the guide hole 142L (within the movement range of the left variable performance member 14L), a starting position, an intermediate position, and an end position of the left variable performance member 14L are provided, and the left variable performance member 14L is located at each position. When the left variable effect member 14L is rotated about the shaft body 143L by the drive of the second motor (forward rotation drive or reverse rotation drive), the left variable effect member 14L changes between an upright state and a state tilted approximately 90 degrees to the right (tilted state). ) (reciprocating rotation). As mentioned above, when the left variable effect member 14L is in the upright state, the left variable effect member 14L is hidden behind the left cover member 17L and difficult to see from the front (see FIG. 3), and the left variable effect member 14L is in the tilted state. As a result, the flag portion 14aL of the left variable effect member 14L becomes visible from the front.

By driving the third motor (forward rotation drive or reverse rotation drive), the shaft body 143R moves up and down along the guide hole 142R, and the right variable presentation member 14R moves up and down accordingly. Thereby, the right variable performance member 14R can be displaced within the vertical movement range allowed by the guide hole 142R. Inside the guide hole 142R (within the movement range of the right variable performance member 14R), a starting position, an intermediate position, and an end position of the right variable performance member 14R are provided, and the right variable performance member 14R is located at each position. When the right variable effect member 14R is rotated about the shaft body 143R by the drive of the fourth motor (forward rotation drive or reverse rotation drive), the right variable effect member 14R changes between the upright state and the state tilted approximately 90 degrees to the left (tilted state). ) (reciprocating rotation). As mentioned above, when the right variable effect member 14R is in the upright state, the right variable effect member 14R is hidden behind the right cover member 17R and difficult to see from the front (see FIG. 3), and the right variable effect member 14R is in the tilted state. As a result, the flag portion 14aR of the right variable performance member 14R becomes visible from the front.

A position detection sensor (not shown) is provided at each of the start, middle and end positions of the left and right variable effect members 14L, 14R, and the signal (detection signal) of each position detection sensor is transmitted to the sub-assembly described below. It is designed to be input to the control board 90. As a result, the performance control microcomputer 91, which will be described later and is mounted on the sub-control board 90, can detect the positions of the variable performance members 14L and 14R that move (up and down) along the left and right guide holes 142L and 142R. It becomes. Note that among the starting point position, intermediate point position, and end point position, the starting point position is also referred to as a "non-operating position", and the intermediate point position and the ending point position are also referred to as an "operating position".

Note that it is also possible to employ a solenoid instead of the motor (second motor, fourth motor) as a driving means for rotating the left and right variable effect members 14L, 14R.

[Electrical configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a main control board ("main control section" or "game control section") that controls the progress of the game and gaming profits, such as special symbol validity determination, normal symbol validity determination, and transition of game states. ) 80, a sub-control board (also referred to as a "sub-control unit" or "performance control unit") 90, which controls the production performed as the game progresses; a payout board, which controls the payout of game balls; It includes a control board (also referred to as a "dispensing control unit") 110, an image control board (also referred to as an "image control unit") 100 that performs display control of the image display device 7, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main control board storage case that stores the main control board 80 is provided approximately in the center thereof, and above the main control board case, An image control board storage case that stores the audio control board 106, lamp control board 107, and image control board 100 is provided, and a sub-control board storage case that stores the sub-control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. ing. Further, a payout control board case housing a payout control board 110 is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power board case housing a power supply board 109 is provided on the right side of the payout control board case.

As shown in FIG. 5, a one-chip microcomputer for game control (also referred to as a "microcomputer for game control") 81 is mounted on the main control board 80, which controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM.

The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The ROM of the main control board 80 (gaming control microcomputer 81) contains tables used for various judgments and decisions (selections) related to game progress, variation patterns of special symbols and normal symbols, the second starting port 21, and the big prize. Various data necessary to control the progress of the game, such as the opening pattern of the mouth 30, are stored.

The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-mentioned special symbol reservation storage section (first special symbol reservation storage section and second special symbol reservation storage section), regular symbol reservation storage section, and the like. Further, at a predetermined address of the RAM (main control RAM) of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81), storage areas for use in various flags and various counting counters are secured.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and signals are output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the first starting hole sensor 20a, the second starting hole sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the big winning hole sensor 30a, and the general winning hole sensor 27a are connected as sensors capable of detecting game balls. These various sensors are also referred to as "ball detection sensors" or "game ball detection means."

A ball detection sensor is, for example, equipped with a detection coil and a transistor whose base or gate is connected to the detection coil, and when a game ball passes through the detection coil, the impedance (electrical resistance) of the detection coil is ) is changed to change the state of the output transistor, so that the output of the transistor can be changed from, for example, an H level to an L level while a game ball is being detected. .

The first starting port sensor 20a is provided in the first starting port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided within the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The big winning hole sensor 30a is provided in the big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 30. The general winning hole sensor 27a is provided in each general winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 27.

As the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24 and the big winning port solenoid 33 are connected. These various solenoids are also referred to as "driving means". The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable prize winning device 22. The big prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the big winning device 31.

The main control board 80 also includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a regular symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, a second special symbol reservation display 43b, and a regular symbol display 43a. A hold indicator 44, a round indicator 45, a game status indicator 46, a firing direction indicator 47, and a hit indicator 48 are connected. Display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by a game control microcomputer 81.

The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for monitoring payout. The payout control board 110 includes a payout device 120 that pays out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1, which stores information on an inserted prepaid card (gaming value storage medium), etc.). A device that allows ball lending based on information about the ball is connected to the terminal, and a firing device 112 is also connected via a firing control board (also referred to as a "launching control circuit") 111. The firing device 112 includes a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. Firing device 112 also includes firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a one-chip microcomputer for payout control (also referred to as a "microcomputer for payout control") 116 that controls the payout of game balls according to a predetermined program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM.

The payout control microcomputer 116 drives the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 via the input/output circuit 117 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1. and pays out prize balls and rental balls. The game balls that are paid out are detected by payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the firing handle 60 of the firing device 112 is operated, the touch switch 114 detects the operator's (player's) contact with the firing handle 60 (rotating operation section 60a), and the firing volume 115 adjusts the firing volume. The operation amount (rotation amount) of the handle 60 (rotation operation section 60a) is detected. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is fired with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115. In this embodiment, the number of game balls that can be continuously fired by the firing device 112 by driving the firing motor 113 is about 100 in one minute.

The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a communication direction regulating means.

As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer (also referred to as "performance control microcomputer") 91 that controls the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a predetermined program. . The production control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling production performed as the game progresses, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. ing.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via the input/output circuit 95. In addition, the input/output circuit 95 may be built in the production control microcomputer 91, and the ROM may be externally attached. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for performance control) contains tables used for various judgments and decisions (selections) related to game performances, performance patterns such as variable performances and preview performances, etc. to control performances. Various necessary data are stored. Further, storage areas for use in various flags and various counting counters are secured at predetermined addresses of the RAM (performance control RAM) of the sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91).

An image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, etc. are connected to the sub-control board 90. The sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for performance control) cooperates with the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 according to the game situation, and controls the display performance, sound performance, and lamp performance (light performance). ), etc., are caused to be performed by corresponding performance devices, members, etc. (performance means). This sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91) functions as performance execution means (also referred to as "performance control means") that can execute various performances depending on the game situation. Note that at least one of the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 can also be considered to function as a performance execution means (performance control means) together with the sub-control board 90.

The sub-control board 90 (production control microcomputer 91) controls the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer (also referred to as "image control microcomputer") 101 of the image control board 100 based on commands received from the main control board 80. to control the display of the image display device 7.

The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores still image data and video data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including performance patterns, reserved patterns, etc.) Various image data such as images and background images are stored. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data. Note that a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

The sub-control board 90 (production control microcomputer 91) outputs audio, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Sound data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90.

Note that a CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and sound data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the image control microcomputer 101 to perform audio control. In this case, the sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100.

Based on commands received from the main control board 80, the sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for performance control) generates light-emission pattern data (on/off, light-emitting color, etc., and is also referred to as "lamp data." Take control.

The sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for performance control) controls the variable performance members 14 (left variable performance member 14L, left variable performance member 14L, Activate the right variable performance member 14R). As mentioned above, the variable performance member 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided at the rear of the cover member 17. The performance control microcomputer 91 inputs data (also referred to as "drive data") for operating the variable performance member 14 in a predetermined operating mode from a plurality of data stored (memorized) in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. It is determined (selected) from among the operation pattern data, and the operation (gimmick effect) of the variable effect member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data.

Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to control the lighting of the lamp and the operation of the variable effect member 14. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

The sub-control board 90 includes a first performance button detection switch 63c and a second performance button detection switch 63c that detects when the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). A production button detection switch 63d is connected. When the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b, a signal from the corresponding performance button detection switch is input to the sub-control board 90. Note that the first performance button detection switch 63c and the second performance button detection switch 63d are also collectively referred to simply as "performance button detection switch."

[Summary of winnings]
Next, the outline (specifications) of winnings of this pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. In this embodiment, there are "jackpot" and "miss" as the results of the special symbol validity determination. As mentioned above, when it is a "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section, and when it is a "loss", the "lost symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section. When a jackpot is determined in the special symbol validity determination, a ``special game'' is executed in which the big prize opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the stopped and displayed special symbol (jackpot type). A special game that is executed as a jackpot is also called a "jackpot game."

There are multiple types of jackpots in this embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the jackpots include "10R (round) 1st jackpot," "10R 2nd jackpot," "10R 3rd jackpot," "10R 4th jackpot," and "10R 5th jackpot." ”, “5R 6th jackpot”, “5R 7th jackpot”, “10R 8th jackpot” and “10R 9th jackpot” in total. Among these jackpots, "10R 1st jackpot", "10R 2nd jackpot", "10R 3rd jackpot", "10R 4th jackpot", "10R 5th jackpot", "5R 6th jackpot" and "5R 7th jackpot" is a jackpot related to the first special symbol, and "10R 8th jackpot" and "10R 9th jackpot" are jackpots related to the 2nd special symbol. In the special symbol display section, jackpot symbols corresponding to these jackpot types are stopped and displayed. Note that in this specification, a round may be expressed as "R".

For the 10R 1st jackpot, 10R 8th jackpot, and 10R 9th jackpot, the number of rounds is "10", the number of openings of the grand prize opening 30 is "once" for each round from 1R to 10R, and the number of openings of the grand prize opening 30 is "1". The jackpot is ``25 seconds'' for each round with an opening time of 1R to 10R. An opening with an opening time of "25 seconds" is also referred to as a "long opening."

For both the 5R 6th jackpot and the 5R 7th jackpot, the number of rounds is "5", the number of openings of the big winning hole 30 is "once" for each round from 1R to 5R, and the opening time of the big winning hole 30 is from 1R to 5R. There is a jackpot of "25 seconds" for each round of 5R.

The 10R second jackpot has a number of rounds of "10", a number of openings of the grand prize opening 30 "once" for each round from 1R to 10R, and a time of opening of the grand prize opening 30 of "25" for each round of 1R to 10R. It was a jackpot of "Seconds".

For the 10R third jackpot, the number of rounds is ``10'', the number of openings of the grand prize opening 30 is ``once'' for each round from 1R to 10R, and the opening time of the grand prize opening 30 is ``1'' for each round from 1R to 7R. 25 seconds,” and each round from 8R to 10R has a jackpot of “0.1 seconds.” An opening with an opening time of "0.1 seconds" is also referred to as a "short opening." Among the jackpot games related to the 10R 3rd jackpot (also referred to as "10R 3rd jackpot games"), in 8R to 10R, the opening time of the jackpot 30 per round is extremely short, "0.1 seconds". Therefore, the possibility that a game ball will enter the big prize opening 30 is extremely low (substantially zero). For this reason, in the 10R third jackpot game, the possibility of the game ball entering the big prize opening 30 is high in 1R to 7R where the opening time per round is "25 seconds", and the game ball can be easily inserted. It becomes possible to let the ball enter the big winning hole 30. Therefore, the 10R third jackpot is substantially a "7R jackpot" and the 10R third jackpot game is substantially a "7R jackpot game."

For the 10R 4th jackpot, the number of rounds is "10", the number of openings of the grand prize opening 30 is "once" for each round from 1R to 10R, and the opening time of the grand prize opening 30 is "1 time" for each round from 1R to 5R. 25 seconds,” and each round from 6R to 10R has a jackpot of “0.1 seconds.” Among the jackpot games related to the 10R 4th jackpot (also referred to as "10R 4th jackpot games"), in 6R to 10R, the opening time of the jackpot 30 per round is extremely short, "0.1 seconds". Therefore, the possibility that a game ball will enter the big prize opening 30 is extremely low (substantially zero). For this reason, in the 10R 4th jackpot game, the possibility of the game ball entering the big winning hole 30 is high in 1R to 5R where the opening time per round is "25 seconds", and the game ball can be easily inserted. It becomes possible to let the ball enter the big winning hole 30. Therefore, the 10R fourth jackpot is essentially a "5R jackpot" and the 10R fourth jackpot game is substantially a "5R jackpot game."

For the 10R 5th jackpot, the number of rounds is "10", the number of openings of the grand prize opening 30 is "once" for each round from 1R to 10R, and the opening time of the grand prize opening 30 is "1 time" for each round from 1R to 3R. 25 seconds,” and each round from 4R to 10R has a jackpot of “0.1 seconds.” Among the jackpot games related to the 10R 5th jackpot (also referred to as "10R 5th jackpot games"), in 4R to 10R, the opening time of the jackpot 30 per round is extremely short, "0.1 seconds". Therefore, the possibility that a game ball will enter the big prize opening 30 is extremely low (substantially zero). For this reason, in the 10R 4th jackpot game, the possibility of the game ball entering the big winning hole 30 is high in 1R to 3R where the opening time per round is "25 seconds", and the game ball can be easily inserted. It becomes possible to let the ball enter the big winning hole 30. Therefore, the 10R fifth jackpot is substantially a "3R jackpot" and the 10R fifth jackpot game is substantially a "3R jackpot game."

Among these nine types of jackpots, the 10R 1st jackpot, 5R 6th jackpot, 5R 7th jackpot, 10R 8th jackpot, and 10R 9th jackpot have a certain interval time (for example, (approximately 0.5 seconds to 1 second), and each round from the first round to the final round is completed with the same (fixed) interval time in between. The 10R 1st jackpot, the 5R 6th jackpot, the 5R 7th jackpot, the 10R 8th jackpot, and the 10R 9th jackpot in which rounds are played in this way can be said to be general jackpots.

On the other hand, the 10R 2nd jackpot and 10R 3rd jackpot (actually 7R jackpot) occur between rounds when the 3rd round, 5th round, and 7th round are completed, and during the other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 6R, The interval time is different between the rounds when 8R and 9R) are completed, and the former is longer than the latter. For example, when the 3rd round, 5th round, and 7th round are completed, the interval time between rounds is "approximately 3 seconds to 5 seconds", and the other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 9R) are The interval time between rounds when the round ends is approximately 0.5 seconds to 1 second.

10R 4th jackpot (actually 5R jackpot) occurs between rounds when the 3rd and 5th rounds are completed, and when the other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 6R, 7R, 8R, 9R) are completed. The interval time is different between the two, with the former having a longer interval time than the latter. For example, when the 3rd round and 5th round are completed, the interval time between rounds is "approximately 3 seconds to 5 seconds", and when the other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 9R) are completed, The interval time between rounds (also referred to as "second interval time") is "approximately 0.5 seconds to 1 second".

10R 5th jackpot (actually 3R jackpot) is between rounds when 3 rounds are completed and between rounds when other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 5R, 6R, 7R, 8R, 9R) are completed. The interval times are different between the two, with the former having a longer interval time than the latter. For example, when 3 rounds are completed, the interval time between rounds is "approximately 3 to 5 seconds", and the other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 5R, 6R, 7R, 8R, 9R) are completed. The interval time between rounds is set to be approximately 0.5 seconds to 1 second.

In the 10R second to fifth jackpots, the relatively long interval time (for example, about 3 seconds to 5 seconds) is also called the "first interval time", and the relatively short interval time (for example, about 0.5 seconds) is also called the "first interval time". 1 second to 1 second) is also referred to as the "second interval time."

Between the rounds where the first interval time is set (also referred to as the "interval period"), it is determined whether the big prize opening 30 will be opened long in the next round as well, that is, the long opening round will be executed (continued). An effect indicating whether or not the image is displayed is executed using the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) or the like. The period between rounds in which the first interval time is set is also referred to as "round branch timing", and the performance executed at the round branch timing is also referred to as "round branch performance".

For example, between rounds (round branching timing) when the third round of a 10R 5th jackpot game ends, the round branching effect is an effect that suggests that the long open round will not be executed (continued) from the next round onwards. For example, between rounds (round branch timing) when a long open round end effect or jackpot end effect) is executed and the third round of the 10R 2nd to 4th jackpot game is completed, as a round branch effect, from the next round onwards. Also, an effect indicating that a long open round will be executed (continued) (for example, a long open round continuation effect) is executed.

In addition, between rounds (round branching timing) when the 5th round of the 10R 4th jackpot game ends, as a round branching effect, a production that suggests that the long open round will not be executed (continued) from the next round onwards ( For example, between rounds (round branch timing) when a long open round end effect or jackpot end effect) is executed and the 5th round of the 10R second and third jackpot games is completed, as a round branch effect, from the next round onwards. Also, an effect indicating that a long open round will be executed (continued) (for example, a long open round continuation effect) is executed.

In addition, between rounds (round branching timing) when the 7th round of the 10R 3rd jackpot game ends, as a round branching effect, a production that suggests that the long open round will not be executed (continued) from the next round onwards ( For example, between rounds (round branch timing) when a long open round end effect or jackpot end effect) is executed and the 7th round of the 10R second jackpot game ends (round branch timing), the long open round effect will also be held from the next round onwards as a round branch effect. An effect (for example, a long open round continuation effect) indicating that the round will be executed (continued) is executed.

In this way, the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots have a longer interval time than other rounds between rounds, which is the turning point (round branch timing) that determines whether or not the long open round continues. (first interval time) is set, and the round branch effect is executed using the interval time. In this way, the jackpot games related to the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots in which the round branch effect is executed at the round branch timing are called "rank up bonuses", and are different from general jackpots such as the 10R 1st jackpot. This is a special jackpot with different gameplay. Hereinafter, the rank-up bonus may be referred to as "RUB".

Here, the round is also referred to as a "round game," and the round game is also referred to as a "big prize opening/closing game," a "variable ball entry game," or a "special ball entry game." Further, the 5R 6th jackpot and 5R 7th jackpot are collectively referred to as the "5R jackpot", and the 10R 1st to 5th jackpots and the 10R 8th and 9th jackpots are also collectively referred to as the "10R jackpot". Furthermore, the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots are also called "special jackpots", and jackpots other than the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots (10R 1st, 8th, and 9th jackpots, 5R 6th and 7th jackpots) This is also called a "general jackpot", and the jackpot game (rank up bonus (RUB)) related to a special jackpot is also called the "first special game", which is a jackpot game related to a general jackpot (5R jackpot game or 10R jackpot game). This is also called the "second special game."

Also, among the special jackpot symbols (specific display mode, specific display result) that trigger the execution of the jackpot game, the jackpot symbols related to the special jackpot (10R second jackpot symbol, 10R third jackpot symbol, 10R fourth jackpot symbol) , 10R 5th jackpot symbol) is also referred to as the "first specific display mode" or "first specific display result", and the jackpot symbols related to general jackpots (10R 1st jackpot symbol, 5R 6th jackpot symbol, 5R 7th jackpot symbol) are also referred to as "first specific display mode" or "first specific display result". The jackpot symbol, the 10R 8th jackpot symbol, the 10R 9th jackpot symbol) are also referred to as a "second specific display mode" or "second specific display result."

In this embodiment, there are two types of jackpots depending on the number of rounds: 5R jackpot and 10R jackpot, but for example, there may be three types: 3R jackpot, 6R jackpot, and 10R jackpot, or one type of 7R jackpot. It is possible to provide various types of jackpots, such as. Further, in this embodiment, the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot game is 10R (10R jackpot), but the maximum number of rounds is not limited to this, and for example, the maximum number of rounds may be more than 10R (for example, 15R), or 10R. It is also possible to set the maximum number of rounds to fewer rounds (for example, 9R).

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is shifted to a high probability state, a time saving state, a high base state, etc. to be described later, depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred (winning). That is, if the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a jackpot and the type of the jackpot is any of the aforementioned 10R 1st to 5th jackpot, 5R 6th jackpot, and 10R 8th jackpot, after the jackpot game ends. The gaming state is controlled to a "high probability state, time saving state, and high base state" which will be described later (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a jackpot and the type of the jackpot is either the 5R 7th jackpot or the 10R 9th jackpot described above, the gaming state after the jackpot game is as described below. It is controlled to be a "low probability state, time saving state, and high base state" (see FIG. 6). From this, 10R 1st to 5th jackpots, 5R 6th jackpots, and 10R 8th jackpots can be regarded as "probable variable jackpots," and 5R 7th jackpots and 10R 9th jackpots are "non-probable variable jackpots" ("usually It can be seen as a "jackpot" or "time-saving jackpot").

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 8(B), when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is judged to be a jackpot, the distribution probability of each jackpot is 5% for the 10R first jackpot, 5% for the 10R first jackpot, and 5% for the 10R first jackpot. 2nd jackpot is 5%, 10R 3rd jackpot is 7%, 10R 4th jackpot is 10%, 10R 5th jackpot is 13%, 5R 6th jackpot is 15%, and 5R 7th jackpot is 45%. On the other hand, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is determined to be a jackpot, the distribution probability of each jackpot is 55% for the 10R 8th jackpot and 45% for the 10R 9th jackpot. There is. In other words, if the jackpot is determined based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 (Special Figure 2 Judgment), the appearance rate (distribution probability) of the 10R jackpot is 100%, and the The occurrence rate (distribution probability) of the 10R jackpot is higher than when a jackpot is achieved by the judgment based on the ball entering the 1 starting hole 20 (special figure 1 judgment). In this way, in this pachinko game machine 1, the game ball enters the second starting port 21 and the game ball enters the second starting port 21, rather than hitting the jackpot in the winning/failure judgment made when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (special figure 1 correcting/failure judgment). It is set so that the player who hits the jackpot in the judgment made after entering the ball (Special Figure 2 judgment) is more likely to be advantageous for the player in terms of the amount of prize balls that can be obtained (number of prize balls). has been done. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting the ball to enter the second starting port 21. This is particularly noticeable during the operation of the release extension function (during the occurrence of a high base state), which will be described later, in which the frequency of balls entering the second starting port 21 increases.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a jackpot or a miss is made based on "random numbers for special symbol propriety determination (also referred to as "properness determination information")", and if the result of the propriety determination is a jackpot, the jackpot The determination of the type is performed based on the "random number for jackpot type determination (also referred to as "random number for symbol determination" or "information for symbol determination")". In this example, as shown in FIG. 7(A), the random number for determining the validity of the special symbol takes a value in the range of "0 to 629", and the random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of "0 to 99". Takes a value. The random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not and the random number for determining the jackpot type are random numbers (acquisition information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

The random numbers (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 include random numbers for determining the validity of special symbols and random numbers for determining jackpot type, as shown in FIG. 7(A). As shown, there is "fluctuation pattern random number (also referred to as "fluctuation pattern information")". The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation time, and in this embodiment takes a value in the range of "0 to 198".

Further, the random numbers (acquired information) acquired based on passage through the gate 28 include random numbers for normal symbol validity determination shown in FIG. 7(B). The random number for normal symbol validity determination is a random number for determining whether or not to perform the auxiliary game that opens the second starting port 21 (normal symbol lottery), and in this embodiment, it is in the range of "0 to 240". Takes a value.

[Game status]
Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. In the pachinko game machine 1, each function of the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of special symbols, the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of normal symbols, and the opening extension function of normal electric accessories are activated or deactivated. Depending on the combination, there are multiple gaming states. Regarding the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability fluctuation function is activated is also referred to as a "high probability state" or "probability variable state," and the state in which it is not activated is referred to as a "low probability state" or " Also called "normal state".

In the high probability state, the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the special symbol validity determination is higher than in the normal state (low probability state). That is, in the normal state, the jackpot determination table for the normal state is used to determine the success or failure, but in the high probability state, the jackpot determination table for the high probability state is used, in which there are many values of random numbers for special symbol validity determination that are determined to be jackpots. (See FIG. 8(A)). In other words, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability that the result of the special symbol variation display will be a jackpot (the stopped symbol will become a jackpot symbol) becomes higher than when it is not activated.

In addition, the state in which the variable time reduction function is activated for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is also referred to as a "time reduction state" or "reduction fluctuation state," and the state in which it is not activated is referred to as a "non-time reduction state." ” or “normal fluctuation state”. In the time-saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbols (time from the start of the fluctuation display to the end (determined display)) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbols in the non-time-saving state. That is, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using a fluctuation pattern table that is determined so that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time-saving state (see FIG. 9). . As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the special figure reservation is consumed becomes faster, and effective ball entry into the starting port (ball entry that can be stored as special figure reservation) is more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may operate at the same time, or only one of them may operate. The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol. That is, the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of the normal symbol operate in the time saving state of the special symbol, and do not operate in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol validity determination is higher than in the non-time-saving state. Specifically, in the time-saving state, a normal symbol hit/fail determination table is used that has a larger number of normal symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) that are determined to be hits than the normal symbol hit determination table used in the non-time-shortened state. symbol determination) (see FIG. 8(C)).

Also, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. In this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time extension function of the variable prize winning device 22 (second starting port 21) is activated, and the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game (game with regular symbols) is longer than in the non-time-saving state. ing. In addition, in the time-saving state, the function of increasing the number of openings of the variable prize winning device 22 is activated, and the number of openings of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state. Specifically, when the result of normal symbol validity determination is a hit in the non-time saving state, the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) performs one opening operation for 0.2 seconds, and the time saving state When the result of the normal symbol validity determination is a hit, the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) performs an opening operation of 2.0 seconds three times.

Under the situation where the probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time shortening function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, compared to when these functions are not operating. As a result, the second starting port 21 is opened frequently, and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 increases. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, the state in which these functions are activated is also referred to as a "high base state" or "high frequency state," and the state in which they are not activated is also referred to as a "low base state." In a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have.

Note that the high base state (high frequency state) does not need to be one in which all of the above functions are activated. That is, by operating at least one of the probability variation function and variation time shortening function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22, when that function is not activated. It is sufficient if the second starting port 21 can be opened more easily (the ball enters the ball more frequently). In addition, in this embodiment, the time saving state of the special symbol and the high base state are generated together (synchronized), but the high base state occurs independently without accompanying the time saving state of the special symbol. You may also do so. The function that generates such a high base state is also referred to as a "high base generation function," and either or both of the open time extension function and the open frequency increase function is also referred to as an "open extension function."

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, the gaming state after the jackpot game (after the special game) when any of the 10R 1st to 5th jackpot, 5R 6th jackpot, and 10R 8th jackpot occurs. is a special symbol high probability state, a special symbol time saving state, and a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is also referred to as a "high-accuracy, high-base state." The high-accuracy-high base state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times, or when a jackpot is achieved and a jackpot game is executed. This high probability/high base state becomes a so-called "probability change state" for the player.

In addition, when either the 5R 7th jackpot or the 10R 9th jackpot occurs, the gaming state after the jackpot game (after the special game) will be the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the special symbol. state and high base state (see Figure 6). This gaming state is also referred to as a "low probability high base state". The low-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

The "low probability high base state" is also referred to as the "first gaming state", and the "high probability high base state" is also referred to as the "second gaming state". Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, three game states can be set: "low probability low base state", "low probability high base state", and "high probability high base state". In addition to this, it may be possible to set a high probability state of the special symbol, a non-time saving state and a low base state of the special symbol, that is, a "high probability low base state".

In a high base state such as a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state, the game can proceed more advantageously if the game ball enters the right game area 3B by hitting the ball to the right. In the high base state, the second starting port 21 is opened more easily than in the low base state, and it is easier for the ball to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. (The possibility of a game ball entering the second starting port is higher than that of the first starting port). For this reason, the game ball is hit right to enter the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball through the gate 28 which is the trigger for normal symbol validity determination. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting pitches (opportunities for determining whether the special symbol is correct) compared to the case where the player hits left-handed. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up in a predetermined manner to notify that the game ball should be fired aiming at the right game area 3B (right-hand hitting instruction notification).

On the other hand, in a low base state (for example, a low probability low base state), it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by making the game ball enter the left game area 3A by hitting the ball to the left. In the low base state, the second starting port 21 is more difficult to open than in the high base state, and it is easier for the ball to enter the first starting port 20 than to enter the second starting port 21. (The possibility of a game ball entering the first starting port is higher than that of the second starting port). Therefore, in order to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 20, the game ball is hit to the left. Thereby, compared to the case of right-handed hitting, a large number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not) can be obtained. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (displayed) controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the game ball should be fired aiming at the left gaming area 3A (left-handed hitting instruction notification).

The firing direction indicator 47 has two LEDs "yz", and can indicate the firing direction by lighting up the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the light should be emitted to the left gaming area as a display mode that turns off both LEDs, such as "y□z□" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the light should be emitted to the right gaming area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the low-probability low base state in which no jackpot games are played is used as a reference, this low-probability low base state can be regarded as the "normal gaming state", and the relevant A game in which special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (variable game) can be regarded as a "normal game." On the other hand, since the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state are gaming states that are more advantageous for the player than the low-accuracy low-base state, these high-accuracy high-base states and low-accuracy high-base states are referred to as "special gaming conditions." A game in which special symbols are variably displayed in this state can be considered as a "special game."

In addition, the jackpot game is a game that can be executed by displaying special symbols in a variable manner and stopping displaying the jackpot symbol, and for the player, the jackpot game is a game that can be executed by displaying special symbols in a variable manner and stopping displaying the jackpot symbol. Since a large amount of prize balls can be won by entering the game ball into the opening 35), a gaming state in which a jackpot game is played is a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than a gaming state in which a jackpot game is not played. I can say that. Therefore, the gaming state in which a jackpot game is played can be regarded as a "special game state", and the jackpot game played in this state can be regarded as a "special game".

In addition, the low base states such as the low-accuracy low-base state and the high-accuracy low-base state are game states in which the game progresses by hitting the game ball to the left into the left gaming area 3A as described above. The state can be interpreted as a "left-handed hitting state." On the other hand, the high base states such as the low-probability high-base state and the high-probability high-base state and the state in which the jackpot game is played aiming at the game ball entering the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 are as described above. Since this is a gaming state in which the game ball enters the right gaming area 3B by hitting right and the game progresses, the high base state and the jackpot gaming state can be regarded as the "right hitting state." As mentioned above, in the high base state (right-handed state), the second starting port 21 is more likely to open than in the low base state (left-handed state), and the second starting port 21 is more open than the first starting port 20. It is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 21, and it is easier to enter the game ball into the second starting port 21, and it is easier to enter the game ball into the second starting port 21, and it is easier to enter the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the jackpot is determined by determining whether the first special symbol is correct or not based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. The setting is such that it is more likely to be advantageous for the player if the second special symbol hits the jackpot based on the ball landing. Therefore, the left-handed hitting state can be regarded as a "normal game state", and a game (variable game) in which special symbols are displayed in a variable manner in this state can be considered as a "normal game". In addition, the right-handed state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player compared to the left-handed state, can be regarded as a "special game state," and a game in which special symbols are displayed variably in this state (variable game) is called a "special game state." ” can be understood as

In addition, when comparing the high probability low base state with the low probability low base state, although they are both low base states, in the high probability state, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated and the special symbol is displayed fluctuating. Since the probability that the result will be a jackpot is higher than the low probability state, the high probability low base state, which is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base state, can be regarded as a "special gaming state". , A game in which special symbols are displayed in a variable manner in this state (variable game) can be regarded as a "special game."

The control related to the settings, transitions, etc. of the various game states described above is performed by the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). Then, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that controls the activation/deactivation of the probability fluctuation function sets the winning probability (jackpot probability) of the special symbol correctness determination to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability. (second probability). In addition, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that controls activation/deactivation of the fluctuation time reduction function can set a shortening fluctuation state (time saving state) in which the fluctuation time of special symbols is shorter than usual. It functions as a shortening fluctuation state setting means (time saving state setting means).

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (game control means) (control processing by the main control unit 80) will be explained based on FIGS. 10 to 36. Note that the counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. Furthermore, in this specification, "S" in S101 and the like ("S" in the flowchart) means a step.

When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the main control main processing, first, initial settings are performed (S101). Initial settings include, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, and CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status, and counter settings. Perform a reset, etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Initial settings (S101) are executed only once after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter.

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by adding one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. The interrupt process (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a 4 ms cycle. Then, after the interrupt processing (S105) ends and until the next interrupt processing (S105) starts, the updating processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating processing (S103) is repeated. executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU while the interrupt is disabled, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt processing (S105), output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) etc. set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, payout control board 110, etc. do. The commands and the like to be output include information regarding the gaming state, the result of special symbol validity determination, symbols as jackpot types, fluctuation patterns, and the like. A command consists of, for example, 2-byte information; in this case, the upper 1 byte is information about the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the contents of the command.

In the input process (S202) that is performed next to the output process (S201), various sensors attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (first starting port sensor 20a, second starting port sensor 21a, big prize winning port sensor 30a, etc.) are mainly used. ) reads the detected signal and stores it in the output buffer of the RAM as prize ball information. Further, a detection signal from a lower tray full detection sensor (not shown) that detects whether the lower tray 62 is full is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as lower tray full data.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. This is performed both during the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started).

Following the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203), the starting port sensor detection process (S204), the starting ball entry process (S205), the regular symbol movement process (S206), and the special pattern movement process (S207), which will be described later. , executes pending ball count processing (S208) and power-off monitoring processing (S209). Thereafter, other processing (S210) that is not deeply related to the present invention is executed, and the interrupt processing (S105) is ended. Then, the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main processing are repeatedly executed until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (see FIG. 10). After that), the interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) that is executed again, the commands etc. set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the starting port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301 ). If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process moves to S305, and if the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of normal symbol pending balls (normal pattern pending It is determined whether or not the number (specifically, the value of a counter provided in the RAM for counting the number of reserved general drawings) is less than 4 (S302).

If the number of normal symbols reserved balls is not less than 4 (NO in S302), the process moves to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal symbols reserved balls is less than 4 (YES in S302), "1" is added to the number of normal symbols reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label -TRND-H, see FIG. 7(B)) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired, and the obtained random number value (obtained information) is stored in an address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls in the regular symbol reserved storage section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S305). If the game ball has not entered the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process moves to S309, and if the game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (YES in S305) , the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of second special figure reserves, specifically the value of the counter that counts the number of second special figure reserves provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) is less than 4 (upper limit number) It is determined whether or not (S306). If the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is not less than 4 (NO in S306), the process moves to S309, and if the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is less than 4 (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. 2 Add 1 to the number of pending pitches (S307).

Subsequently, special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random number counter for determining the validity of special symbols (label -TRND-A) stored in the update value storage area of the RAM (not shown), the random number for determining the jackpot type Obtain the counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (that is, obtain the random number value shown in FIG. 7(A)), and obtain the obtained random number value (obtain information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls in the second special figure reservation storage section 85b.

Next, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 20, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 20a (S309). If no game ball enters the first starting port 20 (NO in S309), the process ends, but if a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (YES in S309), the special Is the number of 1 reserved balls (the number of 1st special symbols reserved, specifically the value of the counter that counts the number of 1st special symbols reserved in the RAM of the main control unit 80) less than 4 (upper limit number)? It is determined whether or not (S310). Then, if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is not less than 4 (NO in S310), the process ends, but if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (YES in S310), special figure 1 is reserved. Add "1" to the number of pitches (S311).

Subsequently, special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S312) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), similarly to the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol validity determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) (that is, the random number shown in FIG. 7(A) is obtained. The acquired random numbers are stored in an address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls in the first special figure reservation storage section.

[Processing at the time of starting ball entry]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the starting ball entering process (S205) following the starting opening sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting ball entry process (S205), first, it is determined whether the number of special map 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process moves to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special map 2 in S307 of the starting port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second starting port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process moves to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) of the immediately preceding starting port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit is read ( S316). Next, the obtained random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the read random numbers, the value of the random number counter for special symbol validity determination (random number value for special symbol validity determination) is determined according to the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state). (Jackpot or Miss) is determined, and if the result of the determination is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is further determined. The judgment in S317 is a preliminary judgment (determination of whether or not it is a jackpot) regarding the special drawing 2 pending prior to the judgment (S1303, S1304) in the special drawing 2 judgment processing (S1202), which will be described later. This corresponds to the so-called "pending read ahead").

The preliminary determination is, for example, the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 8(A), that is, the jackpot determination table for the high probability state if it is in a high probability state, and the jackpot determination table for the normal state if it is in the normal state (low probability state). This can be done by determining whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value based on the table. Further, in S317, in addition to the success/failure determination, the jackpot type determination based on the jackpot type determination random number and the fluctuation pattern determination based on the fluctuation pattern random number can be subject to preliminary determination (pending pre-reading).

Next, in S318, game information (prior determination information) related to the result of the preliminary determination in S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random number value for special symbol validity determination matches the jackpot determination value (validity information); , command data including information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random value for determining the jackpot type), information indicating the value of the fluctuating pattern random number counter (fluctuation pattern random value), etc. and sets the command in the RAM output buffer (S318). The special figure 2 starting ball entry command may include information indicating part or all of the special figure 2 acquisition random number value read in S316 as advance determination information.

By analyzing the special chart 2 starting ball entry command sent from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, it is possible to determine whether the information is related to a jackpot, what type of jackpot it is, which fluctuation pattern, etc. can be specified on the sub-control unit 90 side. In addition to that, in this embodiment, by analyzing the special figure 2 starting ball command, it is possible to determine whether or not the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number will be a jackpot when judged in a high probability state, and whether it is judged in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot if you do so. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the information specified by the received special figure 2 starting ball entry command as pending information (performance pending information), and pre-determines the pending information (performance pending information) at a specific timing. However, it is possible to determine whether performance suspension information is stored that is determined to be a jackpot when a win or fail determination is made in a low probability state. This also applies to the case where the sub-control unit receives a special chart 1 starting ball entry command, which will be described later.

In addition, from the perspective of fraud prevention, among the obtained random values read in S316, the random value for determining the validity of the special symbol is not sent as is to the sub-control unit, but the value of the random number counter for determining the other jackpot type (the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type) Generate command data including information indicating the random number value for type determination), the value of the variable pattern random number counter (variable pattern random number value), and information indicating the result of preliminary determination as a special chart 2 starting ball entry command, and It may also be transmitted to a sub-control unit.

Next, in S319, similarly to the process related to the above-mentioned special figure 2, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 has increased by "1" (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process moves to S320. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls of special map 1 in S311 in the starting port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first starting port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of special map 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process is ended as is.

In S320, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S320), and if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, in a high base state (YES in S320), the processing from S321 onward is not performed. Finish this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving flag is OFF, that is, the low base state is determined (NO in S320), the process proceeds to the process related to the preliminary determination from S321 onwards.

Here, if the time saving flag is ON, that is, if the current gaming state is a high base state, the opening extension function that increases the frequency of balls entering the second starting port 21 is activated, and the validity of the special drawing 2 is activated. The state is such that a judgment (second special symbol validity judgment) is easily made. In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the extinguishment of the special pattern 2 reservation (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed with priority over the extinguishment of the special symbol 1 reservation (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) (so-called Special figure 2 priority variable machine). In such a configuration, for example, if a preliminary determination of special drawing 1 is made and the result is notified to the player through a notice or other performance, and if it is clearly shown that the preliminary determination result is a jackpot, the player , By using the priority of special drawing 2 pending consumption, intentionally eliminate the special drawing 2 holding (setting it to "0") at any timing, and win the jackpot related to special drawing 1 for which the preliminary judgment result was shown. Technological intervention such as intentional generation becomes possible. It is undesirable from the viewpoint of the fairness of the game that the player is able to adjust the timing at which the jackpot occurs in this way. Therefore, if the current gaming state is not a low base state but a high base state (YES in S320), this process is ended without performing the process related to the preliminary determination of special map 1 after S321. .

The processing in S321 to S323 is similar to the processing in S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the starting port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit is read out (S321), A preliminary determination is performed on the read random number value (S322). Then, command data including game information related to this preliminary determination is generated as a special chart 1 starting ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). In addition, the preliminary determination (pending pre-reading) of S322 is performed prior to the validity determination (S1603, S1604) in the later-described special figure 1 validity determination process (S1207).

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the processes of S317 and S322 in the above starting ball entry process (S205) functions as a "prior determination means". In addition, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the preliminary determination (S322) of the special figure 1 acquisition random number value (acquisition information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 The main control unit 80 functions as a "1 preliminary determination means" and executes a preliminary determination (S317) of the special figure 2 acquisition random number value (acquisition information) acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21. (Game control microcomputer 81) functions as a "second preliminary determination means".

[General figure movement processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal figure operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 following the start ball entry process (S205). In the normal pattern movement process (S206), the process regarding the normal pattern display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and the normal pattern movement statuses "1" to "4" are assigned to each of these stages. Then, if the normal symbol movement status is "1" (YES in S401), normal symbol standby processing (S402) is performed, and if it is "2" (NO in S401, YES in S403), normal symbol Perform symbol fluctuation processing (S404), and if it is "3" (NO in both S401 and S403, YES in S405), perform normal symbol confirmation processing (S406), and if it is "4" ( All of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), perform normal electric accessory processing (S407). Note that the normal figure action status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol standby process (S402), it is first determined whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is "0" (YES in S501). ), this process ends without performing the processes after S502. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), a normal symbol propriety determination process to be described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection process, with reference to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8(D), if the gaming state is the time saving state, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern with a normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second is selected. do. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a non-time saving state, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern in which the normal symbol fluctuation time is 30 seconds is selected.

Next, after performing normal symbol random number shift processing (S504), which will be described later, normal symbol variation start processing (S505) is performed, and this processing ends. In the normal symbol variation start process (S505), the variable display of the normal symbol is started based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". In the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of variation of the normal symbols.

[Normal symbol validity determination process]
As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol validity determination process (S502), first, the value (label -TRND-H) of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination stored in the regular symbol reservation storage unit is read out (S601). . Next, it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON (whether the gaming state is in the time saving state) (S602). When it is determined that the time-saving flag is ON, that is, the time-saving state is determined (YES in S602), the table for the time-saving state among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8(C) (the hit determination value is "0" to 239) is used to determine the validity of the high-probability normal pattern (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether the read value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label -TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON in S602, that is, the non-time saving state is determined (NO in S602), the table for the non-time saving state (of the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8(C)) Based on the hit determination value "0", "1"), a low probability common pattern validity determination is made (S603), and the process moves to S605.

In S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal pattern correctness determination (S603, S604) is a hit (normal pattern hit) (S605), and if it is determined that it is not a hit (a loss) (NO in S605), Decide which normal symbol (ordinary symbol) to be stopped and displayed (S606), and end the process. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (YES in S605), the winning normal symbol (symbol per common symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the flag for common symbol is turned ON (S608). , finishes processing.

[Normal pattern random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each common symbol reservation in the common symbol reservation storage unit is shifted by one position from the current position to the side from which it is read (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest level of pending memory in the general pattern holding storage section, is made empty ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth pending general pattern is cleared to 0 (S703 ), the process ends. In this way, the reservations for common maps are cleared in the order of reservation.

[Normal symbol fluctuation processing]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the process during normal symbol fluctuation (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the regular symbol has elapsed (S801), and if it has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing from S802 onwards. Finish this process without performing any further processing. On the other hand, if the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S801), a normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), and the regular symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, perform other processing such as stopping and displaying the normal symbol (ending the fluctuating display of the normal symbol) at the display result (hit normal symbol or missed normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for normal symbol validity determination ( S804), this process ends.

[Normal pattern confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If the ordinary figure flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the normal map per flag is ON (YES in S901), it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON, that is, whether or not the time saving state is in progress (S902). If it is in the time saving state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable prize winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). As described above, the opening pattern during the time saving state is an opening pattern in which opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Correspondingly, in S903, the opening pattern of the second starting port 21 during the time saving state is set, and the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened is set to "3". do.

On the other hand, if it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S902), the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable prize winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S906). As described above, the opening pattern during the non-time saving state is an opening pattern in which opening is performed once for 0.2 seconds. Correspondingly, in S906, the opening pattern of the second starting port 21 during the non-time saving state is set, and "1" is set in the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened. set. Then, following the setting of the opening pattern (S903, S906), the normal pattern operation status is set to "4" (S904), and the present process ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 20, in the normal electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure per end flag is ON (S1001). The common symbol winning end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a winning result.

If the normal pattern hit end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether the timing for opening the second starting port 21 has come (S1003), and if it has not been opened (NO in S1003), this process is finished, If it has been reached (YES in S1003), the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not the timing for closing the second starting port 21 has come (that is, after opening the second starting port 21, a predetermined timing is determined). It is determined (S1005) whether or not the set opening time has elapsed, and if the opening time has not elapsed (NO in S1005), this process is completed, and if it has elapsed (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed. (Closed) (S1006).

Following the closing process of the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether the value of the second starting port opening counter is "0" or not. (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is finished in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if the value of the second starting port opening counter is "0" (YES in S1008), a normal pattern winning end process is performed to end the auxiliary game (S1009), and a normal pattern winning ending flag is set ( S1010), this process ends. The second starting port opening counter becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times in the time saving state, and becomes "0" in the non-time saving state. When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1001 that the normal pattern hit end flag is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 has been completed the number of times set in S903 or S906. , the end flag for normal drawing is turned off (S1011), the normal drawing flag is turned OFF (S1012), the normal drawing action status is set to "1" (S1013), and this process is finished. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be executed again as the normal symbol operation process (S206).

[Special figure movement processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure operation process (S207) following the regular figure operation process (S206). As shown in FIG. 21, in the special figure operation process (S207), the process regarding the special symbol display 41 and the big prize winning device 31 is divided into four stages, and the special figure operation status "1" to "4" is divided into four stages. ” is assigned.

If the "special pattern operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), special symbol standby processing (S1102) is performed, and if it is "2" (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), the special symbol Process during fluctuation (S1104) is performed, and if it is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105), special symbol confirmation processing (S1106) is performed, and if it is "4" (S1101 , S1103, and S1105 are all NO), special electric accessory processing (S1107) is performed as a jackpot game. In addition, the special figure operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls at the second starting port 21 (i.e., the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2) is "0" (S1201 ). If the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value obtained due to the ball entering the second starting port 21, the first starting It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 20 (namely, the number of reserved balls on special map 1) is "0" (S1206). If the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the first starting port 20, the image It is determined whether or not the display screen 7a of the display device 7 is being processed as a standby screen (demonstration screen for waiting for customers is being executed) (S1211), and if so (YES in S1211), the process of S1212 is performed. If not (NO in S1211), a standby screen setting process is executed to display a standby screen (S1212). The standby screen includes the aforementioned effect setting screen (not shown).

In the standby screen setting process (S1212), a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) is set in a state in which the number of special figure reserved balls (the number of special figure 1 reserved balls and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) is "0" and the variable game is not executed. When the time has elapsed, a standby screen is displayed on the display screen 7a. Pachinko gaming machine 1 that occurs (transitions) when the standby screen is displayed, that is, the number of reserved balls for special drawings is "0" and the variable game is not executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds). This state is also referred to as a "waiting state" or "waiting for customers."

If it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls for special map 2 is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, there is one or more memory of the random number counter value obtained due to the ball entering the second starting port 21. In this case, the following special figure 2 validity judgment process (S1202), special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), and special figure 2 variation start process (S1205) are performed in this order. . In addition, if the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second starting port 21 is There is no memory, but if there is memory of one or more random number counter values acquired due to the ball entering the first starting port 20, special figure 1 validity judgment processing (S1207) described later, special figure 1 fluctuation Pattern selection process (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order.

As described above, in this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is performed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0" (YES in S1201). That is, the extinguishment of the second special symbol reservation (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed with priority over the extinguishment of the first special symbol reservation (fluctuating display of the first special symbol). In this embodiment, the judgment based on the second special figure reservation is more likely to result in a jackpot that is profitable for the player than the judgment based on the first special figure reservation (see Fig. 8). (See B).

[Special figure 2 validity judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 23, in the special figure 2 validity determination process (S1202), first, as a determination value, the lowest area of the second special figure reservation storage section 85b of the RAM (i.e., the first of the second special figure reservation The value (label -TRND-A) of the random number counter for special symbol validity determination (oldest memory) stored in the RAM area corresponding to (RAM area corresponding to) is read out (S1301). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON, that is, whether or not the state is high probability (S1302). If it is not a high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is a normal state, the jackpot judgment table for the normal state (the jackpot judgment value is "3") of the jackpot judgment table (see FIG. 8(A)). and "397") to determine whether or not it is correct (S1303). On the other hand, if it is in a high probability state (YES in S1302), a judgment is made based on a jackpot judgment table for a high probability state among the jackpot judgment tables (see FIG. 8(A)) (S1304). In the jackpot judgment table for high probability states, the jackpot judgment values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

If the result of the judgment (S1303, S1304) is a "jackpot" (YES in S1305), the value of the random number counter for jackpot type determination (label -TRND-AS) is read and the jackpot type shown in FIG. 8(B) is read. The jackpot type is determined based on the determination table (S1307), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1308), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1309), and this process is finished. On the other hand, if the result of the success/failure determination (S1303, S1304) is not a "big hit" (it is a "miss") (NO in S1305), a missed symbol is determined (S1306), and this process ends.

Here, when determining the jackpot type, if the jackpot type is determined based on the first special symbol, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. In this case, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol. In addition, the special symbol validity determination and the jackpot type determination determination may be respectively referred to as "determination", or may also be referred to as "determination" including the determination of the jackpot and which jackpot symbol is obtained. Further, these results may also be referred to as "judgment results." The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the validity determination (S1303, S1304) regarding the second special symbol functions as a "second validity determination means". The second validity determining means is also referred to as "second determining means."

[Special figure 2 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), after the special symbol 2 validity determination process (S1202), the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is a time saving state (whether the time saving flag is ON or not) (S1401 ). As a result, if it is determined that it is not in a time-saving state (NO in S1401), that is, if it is in a non-time-saving state, it is then determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S1402).

If it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON in S1402 (YES in S1402), the change A variation pattern is selected based on the pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1403). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P1 to P3 is selected. In this embodiment, it is assumed that once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1402 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1402), then it is determined whether the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "1" or "2" (S1405). The number of pending memories here is the number of memories including information that determines the fluctuation pattern through this process, so the number of pending memories is set to any value from "1" to "4". If it is determined in S1405 that the pending number is "1" or "2" (YES in S1405), the first pending number out table (of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1406). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P4 to P7 is selected.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1405 that the number of reservations is not "1" or "2", that is, it is "3" or "4" (NO in S1405), the second reservation number removal table (the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. A fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) by referring to the part of the table that is in a non-time saving state, is out of position, and has the number of reserved pitches "3, 4" (S1407) . In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P8 to P11 is selected. The first table for losing the number of reservations is set to have a higher possibility of selecting a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time than the second table for losing the number of reservations. Further, the shortest selectable variation time (12000 ms) is also longer than that of the second table for out-of-retention number (4000 ms).

If it is determined in S1401 that the time is shortened (YES in S1401), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S1408). As a result, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1408), the variation pattern is A fluctuation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1409). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P12 to P14 is selected.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1408 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1408), it is determined whether the number of reservations is "1" (S1410). The number of reservations here is also the same as described above, and the number of reservations is set to any value from "1" to "4". If it is determined that the number of balls on hold is "1" in S1410 (YES in S1410), the third table for out of number of balls on hold (from the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1411). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P15 to P18 is selected.

If it is determined in S1410 that the number of reservations is not "1", that is, it is determined that the number of reservations is any one of "2" to "4" (NO in S1410), the fourth reservation number removal table (the fluctuation shown in FIG. A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) by referring to the part of the pattern table that is in the short-time state, is out of order, and corresponds to the number of reserved balls "2 to 4" (S1411) . In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P19 to P22 is selected.

Here, the possibility that a short fluctuation pattern will be selected is made higher than the fluctuation pattern selected when the time is short and the result is off compared to the fluctuation pattern that is selected when the time is short and the result is off. There is. This is to speed up the speed at which special symbols are reserved by selecting more variation patterns with short variation times in the time-saving state (to speed up the game during the time-saving state).

After selecting a variation pattern as described above, other processing shown in FIG. 24 is performed (S1404), and this processing ends. In other processing (S1404), processing such as setting a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the output buffer of the RAM is performed. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 through output processing (S201).

The types and number of special symbol variation patterns (also referred to as "special symbol variation patterns") are not limited to those shown in this example (see FIG. 9), and may be different from those in this example. The type and number of variation patterns may be increased or decreased, etc., as desired.

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage section 85b is set to one level lower (for example, when the second special figure reservation storage section 85b consists of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003") , address "0000" side) (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the second special figure reservation storage section 85b (S1503), and this processing is finished.

After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) is executed as shown in FIG. In the special figure 2 variation start process (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2", a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the variation display of the second special symbol is started.

[Special figure 1 validity judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 27, in the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1207), processing (S1601 to S1609) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 validity determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to special figure 1, in S1601, the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage section 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first piece of the first special figure reservation) is The stored random number counter value (label -TRND-A) for determining the validity of special symbols is read out and processed. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the validity determination (S1603, S1604) regarding the first special symbol functions as a "first validity determination means". The first validity determining means is also referred to as "first determining means."

[Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208) follows the same flow as the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (S1701 to S1712). )I do. Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted.

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage section is shifted to the lower side by one (S2002). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage section (S1803), and this process is finished.

After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) is executed as shown in FIG. In the special figure 1 variation start process (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol fluctuation processing]
As shown in FIG. 31, in the special symbol variation process (S1104), first, the variation time of the special symbol, that is, the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 described above (see FIG. 9) It is determined whether or not the period has elapsed (S1901). If it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the process ends without performing the processes from S1902 onwards. As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is continued.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S1903), and if it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (S1904), and whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" or not is determined. Determine (S1905). If it is determined that the probability variation counter is "0" (YES in S1905), the probability variation flag is turned OFF and the process proceeds to S1907. The process of S1906 ends the high probability state (variable probability state). On the other hand, if it is determined in S1903 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S1903), or if it is determined in S1905 that the probability variation counter is not "0" (NO in S1905), the process moves to S1907.

In S1907, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON (S1907). If it is determined that the time-saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the value of the time-saving counter that counts the number of times the special symbol is displayed during the time-saving state is decremented by one (S1908), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (S1909). If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (YES in S1909), the time-saving flag is turned OFF (S1910) and processing proceeds to S1911. The time-saving state (and the high base state) ends as a result of processing S1910. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1907 that the time-saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907), or if it is determined in S1909 that the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1909), processing proceeds to S1911.

In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processes such as stopping and displaying the special symbol (ending the variable display of the special symbol) are performed according to the display results of the random number for determining the validity of the special symbol and the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1912). Finish processing. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the stop display time (stop display period) of the special symbol (stop symbol) when stopping (ending) the variable display of the special symbol. Then, when the set stop display time (stop display period) has elapsed, special symbol confirmation processing (S1106) is performed.

In addition, the process of turning off the probability change flag based on the value of the probability change counter becoming "0" or turning off the time saving flag based on the value of the time saving counter becoming "0" (S1906, S1910) The main control unit 80 (gaming control microcomputer 81) that executes this functions as a "gaming state control means."

[Special design confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special symbol confirmation process (S1106), first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), then it is determined whether the type of the confirmed jackpot (current jackpot) is a 10R jackpot (S2002). As a result, if it is determined that it is a 10R jackpot (YES in S2002), the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game is set to "10" (S2003), and the process moves to S2009. . On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the type of jackpot is not a 10R jackpot (NO in S2002), the type of confirmed jackpot (this jackpot) is a 5R jackpot, so the value of the round counter is set to "5" ( S2004), the process moves to S2009.

In S2009, a jackpot opening pattern is set according to the determined jackpot type (type) (S2009), and the process moves to S2010. Here, as mentioned above, the jackpot opening pattern is determined according to the type of jackpot (see Figure 6), so in S2009, the jackpot opening pattern (long Set the number of openings, short openings, number of openings, etc.). Then, the opening operation of the big winning hole 30 based on the big winning hole opening pattern set in S2009 is executed in the jackpot game (special game).

In S2010, a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2010). In this example, the opening commands include a first opening command corresponding to the 10R first jackpot, a second opening command corresponding to the 10R second to fifth jackpot, a third opening command corresponding to the 5R sixth jackpot, and a 5R A total of six types of opening commands are provided: a fourth opening command corresponding to the seventh jackpot, a fifth opening command corresponding to the 10R eighth jackpot, and a sixth opening command corresponding to the 10R ninth jackpot.

In S2010, an opening command is set according to the type of jackpot decided this time (jackpot to start). Then, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) transmits the set opening command to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing by output processing (S201). The sub-control unit 90 that has received the opening command executes a predetermined opening production process based on the opening command. In this example, the opening command corresponding to the 10R second jackpot to the fifth jackpot is a common command (second opening command), and the opening performance is the same for the 10R second jackpot to the fifth jackpot (same production mode). It is said that This is in consideration of the gameplay of RUB, that is, the gameplay that makes players pay attention to how long a long open round will last, and this allows players to check the type of jackpot through performances related to jackpots (special jackpots) such as opening performances. This is to make it difficult to distinguish.

Next, the opening period of the jackpot game is started (S2011), and the special figure operation status is set to "4" (S2012). Further, if it is determined in S2001 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S2001), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2013), and the process ends.

The opening period is the period before the first opening operation of the jackpot opening in the jackpot game, and is the stop display time ("stop display period" or "determined stop period") of the special symbol (performance symbol) that is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol. It is a period set after the elapse of ), and is a period in which the variable display of special symbols (production symbols) is not executable. The opening period is also referred to as a "start period," and the performance (opening performance) performed during the opening period (start period) is also referred to as a "start performance."

In this embodiment, the opening period (opening time) is determined by the type of confirmed jackpot and the gaming state when the jackpot is confirmed (when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed). The opening period can be specified by the opening command. Therefore, the sub-control unit 90 that has received the opening command can perform the opening performance based on the jackpot type and opening period specified by the opening command. The length of the opening period (opening time) is generally set to a length that allows the player to recognize that a jackpot game has started; for example, the length of the opening period is longer than the jackpot stop display time. It can be done. Further, the length of the opening period (opening time) may be varied depending on the gaming state when a jackpot occurs or the type of jackpot.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the above special symbol standby process (S1102), special symbol fluctuation process (S1104), and special symbol confirmation process (S1106) functions as a "variable game execution means" It is something.

[Special electric accessory processing (jackpot game)]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the special electric accessory processing (S1107), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S2101), and if it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2101) , the probability change flag is turned OFF (S2102), and then it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined in S2103 that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S2103), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104) and the process proceeds to S2105. Note that if it is determined in S2101 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S2101), the probability variation flag is OFF, so the process proceeds to S2103 without performing the process in S2102. Further, if it is determined in S2103 that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S2103), the time saving flag is OFF, so the process proceeds to S2105 without performing the process in S2104. In other words, while the jackpot game is being executed, the control is made to a low probability state and a non-time saving state. In this embodiment, since the low base state is always maintained during the non-time saving state, the low base state is also controlled during the execution of the jackpot game.

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that the operation processing of the jackpot device 31 (opening processing of the jackpot opening 30) has been completed (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game. If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), then it is determined whether it is time to start a round (S2106). This is determined based on the jackpot opening pattern set for each jackpot type described above. For example, if it is before the start of the first round, the determination is made based on whether the opening period has ended and it is time to execute the first release process of the first round. If the first round has already started, the determination is made based on whether the previous round has ended and a predetermined interval time has elapsed (the interval period has ended).

If it is determined in S2106 that it is time to start a round (YES in S2106), a round start command for the corresponding round is set (S2107), and a big prize opening opening process is performed (S2108). As a result, the big prize opening 30 becomes open and a predetermined round starts. In S2107, a round start command that can specify the round to start is set, for example, "1R start command" for the start of the first round, "2R start command" for the start of the second round, etc. . The set round start command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 through the output process in S201. In addition, in the big winning opening opening process of S2108, the big winning opening 30 is opened based on the big winning opening opening pattern determined according to the type of jackpot to be executed, that is, the big winning opening opening pattern set in S2009 described above. In order to open the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 32 is operated (opening operation).

If it is determined in S2106 that it is not time to start the round (NO in S2106), the process moves to S2112. Here, cases where it is determined that it is not the time to start a round include, for example, during the opening period before the start of one round, during the round game, during the interval period after the end of the round game (during the big winning hole closing process), etc. .

In S2112, it is determined whether or not the big winning hole opening operation is being executed, that is, whether the big winning hole opened by the process of S2108 is still being opened (during the round game) (S2112). As a result, if it is determined that the big winning opening operation is not being executed (during a round game) (NO in S2112), the process moves to S2116, and it is determined that the big winning opening opening operation is being executed (during a round game). If it is determined (YES in S2112), it is determined whether the termination condition (round termination condition) of the round game being executed is satisfied (S2113).

Here, the round end conditions of this embodiment are as follows: (1) The opening time of the big prize opening set in the round game being executed (for example, 25 seconds), that is, the execution time of the round game has elapsed; (2) Two conditions are set: that a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) have entered the big prize opening in the round game being executed. If one of the conditions is satisfied first, it means that the round end condition is satisfied based on the condition that is satisfied first. If it is determined in S2113 that the round end condition is not satisfied (NO in S2113), the process ends.

If it is determined in S2113 that the round end condition is satisfied (YES in S2113), a round end command for the corresponding round is set (S2114), and the process moves to S2115. In S2114, a round end command that can specify the round to end is set, for example, "1R end command" for the end of the first round, "2R end command" for the end of the second round, etc. . The set round end command is sent to the sub-control unit 90 through the output process in S201.

In S2115, the big winning hole closing process is performed, and the opening/closing member 32 of the big winning hole 30 is operated (closing operation) to bring the big winning hole 30 into a closed state (S2115). In addition, in the big winning opening closing process (S2115), a closing time for keeping the big winning opening 30 in a closed state, that is, an interval time is set. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the first interval time (for example, about 3 seconds to 5 seconds) and the second interval time (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 1 second) are provided as the interval time. , the first interval time or the second interval time is set depending on the type of jackpot game being executed and the number of rounds of the round game that has ended (S2115).

Next, in S2116, it is determined whether or not the interval time has elapsed (S2116), and if it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (during the interval period) (NO in S2116), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (YES in S2116), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2117), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0" (S2118). Then, if it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2118), the present process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2118), a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (S2119), and a jackpot ending period is started. (S2120), turns on the jackpot end flag (S2121), and ends this process. Note that the value of the round counter becomes "0" when all round games in the jackpot game to be executed are completed.

In S2119, an ending command is selected from a plurality of predetermined ending commands according to the gaming state at the time of the current jackpot occurrence, the type of the current jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot game, etc., and the selected ending command is selected. Command is set. The ending period (ending time) to be executed (set) is determined by the type of ending command set in this way. The ending period is a period that is set after all the opening operations of the big prize opening 30 in the jackpot game are completed and before the variable display of special symbols (performance symbols) can be executed. The ending period is also referred to as the "end period." During the ending period (end period), the big prize opening 30 is in a closed state. The performance performed during the ending period (end period) is also referred to as an "ending performance" or "end performance."

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) transmits the ending command set in S2119 to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing by output processing (S201). Then, the sub-control unit 90 that has received the ending command performs execution processing of a predetermined ending effect based on the ending command.

If it is determined that the jackpot end flag is ON in S2105 (YES in S2105), the final round in the jackpot game has ended, so whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed, that is, in the process of S2120 described above, It is determined whether the end timing of the ending period that has started has arrived (S2122). As a result, if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2122), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2122), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2123), and a game state setting process (S2124) to be described later is performed. Next, the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2125), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2126), and this process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) will be executed again as the special symbol operation process (S207).

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the above special electric accessory processing (S1107) functions as a "special game execution means".

[Game status setting process]
As shown in FIG. 34, in the game state setting process (S2124), first, it is determined whether the jackpot game that has ended this time is related to a variable probability jackpot (S2201). In this example, as mentioned above, the three types of variable probability jackpots are the 10R 1st jackpot, 5R 2nd jackpot, and 10R 4th jackpot, so in S2201, if it falls under any of these three types, Determine whether or not. If it is determined that what ended this time was a probability variable jackpot (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), the probability variation counter is set to "10,000" (S2203), and the time saving flag is further set. is turned ON (S2204), and the time saving counter is set to "10,000" (S2205), and the process ends.

Here, the value set in the probability variation counter is the number of times that special symbol validity determination can be executed with high probability. The value "10,000" (10,000 times) set in this example is based on the jackpot probability in a high probability state, the daily business hours of the game parlor, and the special drawing validity judgment that can be executed during the business hours. Considering the number of times, etc., this is essentially the same as guaranteeing a high probability state until the next jackpot occurs or until business hours end. Therefore, when the gaming state is set to a high probability state, it can be said that the high probability state is guaranteed until the next jackpot occurs (substantially the same meaning). In addition, when the probability change flag is ON, the time saving counter is also set to "10,000", so while this high probability state is set, the time saving state (open extension state) is also set. You can say that. That is, when the jackpot game related to the variable probability jackpot ends, the gaming state becomes the "high probability high base state" (second gaming state). In addition, as in this embodiment, the value of "10,000" may be set in the probability variation counter and the time saving counter, and the high probability/high base state may be set substantially until the next jackpot, or the probability variation flag When the time saving flag is ON, control may be adopted in which a high-accuracy, high-base state is set until the next jackpot occurs without setting a value in the counter.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2201 that it is not a probability variable jackpot (NO in S2201), that is, if the game that has ended this time is a jackpot game related to a non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot), the time saving flag is set without turning the probability variable flag ON. is turned on (S2206), and the time saving counter is set to "100" (S2207), and the process ends. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, two types of 5R third jackpot and 10R fifth jackpot are non-probable jackpots (normal jackpots), so when a jackpot game related to either of these two types ends, The gaming state becomes a "low probability high base state" (first gaming state). The low-accuracy/high-base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the special symbol is displayed 100 times (special symbol validity judgment is performed 100 times), and the next jackpot occurs. .

The time saving counter and the probability change counter count the total number of times the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the number of times the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Note that the values to be set in the time saving counter and the probability change counter are not limited to the values set in this embodiment, and may be arbitrarily determined in consideration of the playability, ball hitting performance, specifications, etc. of the pachinko gaming machine 1. can.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the above gaming state setting process (S2124) functions as a "gaming state control means".

[Held pitch count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number process (S208) following the special figure operation process (S207). As shown in FIG. 35, in the reserved ball number processing (S208), first, the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 is read out. (S2501). Next, data on the number of held balls (a held ball number command for transmitting information indicating the number of held balls to the sub-control board 90, etc.) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502). The data related to the number of pending pitches (number of pending pitches command) is output by the output process (S201) in the next interrupt processing (S105), and the data related to the number of pending pitches (number of pending pitches command) is output for each interrupt processing. Setting to the output buffer (S2502) and output processing (S201) are performed sequentially.

When the sub-control unit 90 that has received the held ball number command determines that there has been an increase or decrease in the number of special figure held balls based on the received held ball number command, the sub-control unit 90 adjusts the effect on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 accordingly. The display contents of the pending display areas (first performance pending display area 9c, second performance pending display area 9d, variable pending display area 9e) are updated. Specifically, for example, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases by 1 from "3" to "4", the first effect reserved 9a corresponding to the increased number of special figure 1 reserved balls "4" is set. It is additionally displayed in the first effect pending display area 9c. In addition, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls decreases by 1 from "2" to "1" (in other words, when the first special figure reservation is exhausted), the left end of the first effect reservation display area 9c (special figure 1 reservation The first performance hold 9a displayed in the area corresponding to the number of pitches "1" (see Figure 3) is moved to the variable hold display area 9e (see Figure 3), and along with this, the first performance hold is moved. The first performance reservation 9a displayed in the display area 9c is moved (shifted) by one position to the left (in the direction of decreasing the number of reservations).

In addition, regarding the data of the number of special pattern held balls when the number of special pattern held balls is added, that is, the data of the number of special pattern held balls due to the occurrence of starting balls (starting winnings), please use the above-mentioned starting ball entering command. Alternatively, a number of reserved balls command indicating the number of special pattern reserved balls after addition (after starting balls entered) may be set in the output buffer together with the starting balls command. In addition, regarding the data of the number of reserved balls when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is subtracted, that is, the data of the number of reserved balls of special symbols accompanying the start of fluctuation of special symbols (expiration of special symbol reservation), use the above-mentioned fluctuation start command. Alternatively, a pending ball count command indicating the number of special figure pending balls after subtraction (after the special figure pending consumption) may be set in the output buffer together with the fluctuation start command.

[Power-off monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S209) following the pending ball count process (S208). As shown in FIG. 36, in the power-off monitoring process (S209), first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601), and if there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if a power-off signal is input (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether it is a fixed change or not, whether it is in a winning game or not, how many balls are on hold, and the remaining number of changes in the fixed change/time saving) is determined. etc.) in the RAM (S2602), turns on the power-off flag (S2603), and thereafter performs loop processing without returning to interrupt processing (S105).

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 (performance control means) (control processing by the sub-control unit 90) will be explained based on FIGS. 37 to 43. Note that the counters, flags, status, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit).

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 37 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and executes it. In addition, as the power is turned on, a power-on command is sent from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90, so the production control microcomputer 91 executes the sub-control main processing program based on the reception of the power-on command. is read from the ROM of the sub-control board 90.

As shown in FIG. 37, in the sub-control main processing, first, CPU initialization processing is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack settings, constant settings, CPU 92 settings, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and reset of various flags, statuses, and counters are performed.

Next, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If this determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. In other words, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned ON but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. When the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset.

Note that the processes in S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter. That is, as mentioned above, when the power is turned on, a power-on command is sent from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90, so the production control microcomputer 91 performs the steps from S4001 to S4001 based on the reception of the power-on command. Execute the process of S4003. In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 91 also performs the same process as the power-off monitoring process (S209) by the game-control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. Then, the data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In other words, data related to performance control in the event of a power outage such as a power outage is backed up. For this reason, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on after recovering from a power outage such as a power outage (returning from a power outage), the effect will be controlled by the effect control microcomputer 91. The state returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

S4004 disables interrupts. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed updating process (S4005), the values of various performance determining random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90. The random number for performance determination includes a random number for determining a variable performance that determines the mode of performance symbol game performance to be executed (variable performance pattern), a random number for determining a preview performance that determines a preview performance, and a random number for determining a performance symbol that determines a performance symbol. There are random numbers, etc. The random number updating method can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Note that when updating the random numbers, the random numbers may be added in increments of 2 instead of incrementing them in increments of 1.

The random number for performance determination is acquired at a predetermined timing. This timing may be, for example, when the main control board 80 sends a control signal (starting ball command) notifying that a starting ball has arrived, or when the main control board 80 sends a control signal (starting ball entering command) notifying the start of fluctuation. This can be done when a fluctuation start command (fluctuation start command) is sent, or when a fluctuation effect pattern to be described later is determined. The acquired random number for effect determination is stored in a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as "sub output buffer") in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are sent to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp. Among the control boards 107, the command is sent to the control board to which the corresponding command is sent. Each control board (each control unit) that receives the command uses various presentation devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, variable presentation member 14, etc.) to perform various effects according to the received command. Execute a performance (performance symbol game performance, special game performance, etc.).

The production control microcomputer 91 then permits an interrupt (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of performance symbols etc. displayed on the display screen 7a (performance symbol display area 7b) of the image display device 7, lighting control of various lamps, operation control of the variable performance member 14 ( Variable performance control), audio output control from speakers, etc. can be performed as the game progresses.

[Reception interrupt processing]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the reception interrupt processing (S4008), it is determined whether the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON or not, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input section of the production control microcomputer 91. It is determined whether or not it has been input (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands sent from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4102), and this processing ends. This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process that is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 2 msec period is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 39, in the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing is performed to create switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the production button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). ). Next, a lamp data output process (S4202) is performed to output lamp data for causing various lamps (illumination members) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 to emit light, and the variable effect member 14 is activated (driving the driving means). ) is performed (S4203). Note that the lamp data and drive data are created by a 10ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later. Then, watchdog timer processing is performed to reset the watchdog timer (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process that is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 10 msec period is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 40, in the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010), first, received command analysis processing (S4302), which will be described later, is performed. Next, switch state acquisition processing is performed to store the switch data created in the 2ms timer interrupt processing in the RAM of the sub control board 90 as switch data for the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4303), and the display screen is changed based on the stored switch data. Switch processing is performed to set the display contents etc. of 7a (S4304). Then, it creates lamp data for making the illumination member emit light, creates drive data for operating the variable effect member 14 (drives the driving means), updates the random number for effect determination, etc. Other processing is performed (S4305), and this processing ends.

If the variable performance pattern set in S4505 (described later) or the preview performance pattern set in S4506 (described later) includes the operation (variable performance) of the variable performance member 14, the drive data of the variable performance member 14 is It is created based on the operation pattern (variable performance pattern) of the included variable performance member 14.

[Received command analysis processing]
As shown in FIG. 41, in the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a starting pitch command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4390). If it is determined that the starting ball entering command has not been received (NO in S4390), the process moves to S4401, and if it is determined that the starting ball entering command has been received (YES in S4390), the production pending information storage process (S4395 ) and pending icon notification processing (S4400), and then the process moves to S4401.

The performance pending information storage process (S4395) stores various information (pre-judgment results, jackpot type determination error) included in the starting ball command (special chart 1 starting ball command or special chart 2 starting ball command) received in S4390. (game information such as numerical values, random fluctuation pattern values, etc.) according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special symbol pending balls at the time of sending and receiving the starting ball entry command (when generating the command) , is stored in a predetermined effect pending information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format. For example, if the received starting ball command is a special chart 1 starting ball command that corresponds to the number of reserved balls of special chart 1 "4", the preliminary judgment result and hit type included in the special chart 1 starting ball command This information is stored as special figure 1 performance pending information in an area corresponding to the number of reservations 4 in the special figure 1 performance pending information storage area.

The performance pending information stored in this way is used to execute various performances such as a variable performance, a preview performance, and a performance mode, which will be described later. The storage contents (performance pending information) of the production pending information storage area in the sub-control board 90 are stored in the special figure pending storage section (first special figure pending storage section, second special figure pending storage section) in the above-mentioned main control board (main control section) 80. This matches the stored content (obtained information) of the reserved storage unit). From this, the effect pending information storage area of the sub-control board 90 can also be said to be an "acquired information storage means (also simply referred to as a "storage means")."

In addition, the production pending information is also referred to as "pre-read information", the special figure 1 production pending information is also referred to as "first pre-read information", and the special figure 2 production pending information is also referred to as "second pre-read information". . In addition, the performance pending information storage area (obtained information storage means) is also referred to as "pre-reading information storage means", the special figure 1 performance pending information storage area is also referred to as "first pre-reading information storage means", and special figure 2 The performance pending information storage area is also referred to as "second prefetch information storage means."

The pending icon preview process (S4400) is a process related to a pending icon preview, which is a type of preview performance based on the performance pending information (prior determination result) stored in S4395. Pending icon preview means that the display mode of the performance pending (pending icon) displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed in a different display mode than usual (also referred to as "preview display mode"), and it is possible to win a jackpot depending on the preview display mode. It is a performance that suggests gender (expectation level). The pending icon notice is also referred to as a "pending change notice." The pending icon preview is a type of display effect performed on the display screen 7a. The pending icon notification process (S4400) will be described later.

In S4401, it is determined whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401). If it is determined that a fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4401), a fluctuation production start process (S4402) described later is performed and the process proceeds to S4403, and if it is determined that a fluctuation start command has not been received (YES in S4401). NO), proceed to the process of S4405 without performing the process of S4402.

In S4403, it is determined whether a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403). If it is determined that a fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4403), a fluctuation performance end process is performed to stop displaying the performance symbols and end the fluctuation performance (S4404). In the fluctuating performance end process (S4404), a fluctuating performance end command for stopping and displaying the performance symbol 8 and ending the fluctuating performance is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is sent to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect pattern 8 that was being displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display is stopped and the variable performance (performance symbol game performance) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4403 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the process in S4404. Incidentally, the variable performance refers to various types of variable games that are performed from when the special symbol starts the variable display until it ends (stop display), such as the variable display and stop display of the production symbol 8, the reach effect described below, etc. Refers to performance. The variable performance performed on the display screen 7a is a type of display performance.

The sub-control unit 90 (performance control microcomputer 91) that executes the variable performance start process (S4402) and the variable performance end process (S4404) also functions as a "variable game execution means".

In S4405, it is determined whether a jackpot game related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405). The jackpot game-related commands are commands sent from the main control board 80 when executing the jackpot game, and specifically, the opening commands (see S2010) that are sent at the start of the jackpot game (occurrence of jackpot). ), a round start command sent at the start of a round (see S2107), a round end command sent at the end of a round (see S2114), an ending command sent at the end of a jackpot game (see S2119), etc. is applicable. In S4405, it is determined whether any of these jackpot game related commands have been received, and if not received (NO in S4405), the process moves to S4407, and if received (YES in S4405) , performs jackpot game related production processing related to execution of production according to the type of the received command (S4406).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies an opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub-output buffer. If the received command is a round start command, a round effect command that specifies a round effect according to the round specified based on the command is set in the sub-output buffer. If the received command is an ending command, an ending effect command that specifies an ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub-output buffer. When these set jackpot-related effect commands are sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 executes effects related to the jackpot game such as opening effects, round effects, and ending effects (also called "jackpot game effects" or "jackpot game related effects") on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 according to the progress of the jackpot game. The jackpot game effects (jackpot game related effects) performed on the display screen 7a are a type of display effect.

Finally, the process of S4407 is performed to end this process. In S4407, as other processing, for example, processing based on other received commands (for example, normal symbol fluctuation start command and normal symbol fluctuation stop command) other than the various commands described above is performed (S4407).

[Variable effect start processing]
Next, the variable effect start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, in the variable performance start process (S4402), first, random number processing for performance determination is performed to obtain various random numbers for performance determination such as a random number for determining variable performance, a random number for determining preview performance, and a random number for determining performance symbols. (S4501) In this embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on this acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the effect symbol game effect to be executed (variable effect), the mode of the preview effect, the effect pattern to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined.

Next, in S4502, the fluctuation start command received in S4401 described above is analyzed (S4502). The fluctuation start command includes a fluctuation pattern designation command (information that designates a fluctuation pattern) that designates the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The information specifying the variation pattern includes the variation pattern information (P1 to P22) shown in FIG. 9, the gaming state information specifying the current gaming state, the determination result of the first special symbol validity determination or the second special symbol validity determination, It includes symbol information that specifies the jackpot type (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are two types of variation pattern specification commands, one corresponding to the first special symbol and one corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern specification command, the production symbol game production to be started this time ( It becomes possible to determine whether the fluctuating display of performance symbols) is related to special figure 1 or special figure 2. Note that the variable pattern information, game state information, symbol information, etc. can also be used in processes other than the variable performance start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the current mode status is referred to (S4503). The mode status is for determining the production mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the production mode A to E. Specifically, mode status "1" corresponds to production mode A, mode status "2" corresponds to production mode B, mode status "3" corresponds to production mode C, and mode status "4" corresponds to production mode C. The mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

Here, the performance mode refers to the performance format (performance environment) when a variable game is executed (variable game state), and when the performance mode is different, the background of the display screen 7a, variable performance, reach performance, etc. Part or all of the performance modes of various display performances such as preview performances are different. Specifically, the display mode of the effect pattern 8 (for example, pattern design, number design, etc.) may be different, or the characters, items, and background images that appear may be different, etc. Some or all of the display) differs depending on the production mode. In addition, the performance symbol game performance and the jackpot game performance can be executed in a manner according to the performance mode, and when providing multiple game performances (preview performance, reach performance, round performance, etc.), the performance mode It is possible to perform different game effects depending on the type of game.

In this embodiment, production mode A and production mode B are production modes that can be executed when the gaming state is a low probability low base state, and production mode C is executable when the gaming state is a low probability high base state. The production mode D is a production mode that can be executed when the gaming state is a high probability high base state, and the production mode E is set when the gaming state is either a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state. It is also a production mode that can be executed. Therefore, when the performance mode is one of "A" to "D", the player can check whether the current gaming state is a low-probability low-base state or a low-probability high-base state (time saving) by checking the performance mode. It is possible to grasp whether the game is in a high probability high base state (probability variable gaming state). On the other hand, if the production mode is "E", even if the player checks the production mode, the player may be unsure whether the current gaming state is a low probability high base state (time saving state) or a high probability high base state (probability variable gaming state). It is difficult (impossible) to understand (discriminate) whether this is the case. In this sense, production mode E can be said to be a "gaming state non-notification mode".

Next, in S4504, a variable performance pattern determination table (not shown) is set for determining an execution pattern (also referred to as a "variable performance pattern") of a variable performance using performance symbols etc. based on the result of the special symbol propriety determination ( S4504). Specifically, the variable effect pattern determination table to be used is set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variable pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. For example, if the fluctuation pattern information specified by the received fluctuation pattern specification command is "P1 (fluctuation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), the fluctuation performance pattern determination table may be used to determine the jackpot time fluctuation corresponding to the current performance mode. A performance pattern determination table is set. In this embodiment, since a plurality of variable performance pattern determination tables corresponding to the performance mode (mode status) are stored in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, in S4504, from among these variable performance pattern determination tables, The table corresponding to the mode status (current production mode) referenced in S4503 is selected and set.

The variable production pattern determination table is mainly used to determine the execution mode of production symbol game production (variation mode of production symbols, etc.), and contains multiple variable production pattern determination tables ( (not shown) is stored in advance in the ROM of the sub control board 90. In S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current performance mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from among these variable performance pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the variable effect obtained in S4501 and the variable effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variable effect pattern that matches the specified variable pattern (special figure variable pattern) is determined (selected). , set this (S4505). Since the special symbol fluctuation pattern defines the fluctuation time of the special symbol, that is, the execution time of the fluctuation game (see Fig. 9), the execution time (execution) of the fluctuation performance based on the fluctuation performance pattern set in S4505 period) will be based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern.

As the variation performance pattern, the variation mode of the performance symbol 8 displayed in the performance symbol display area 7b (execution mode of the performance symbol game performance) is mainly set. Thereby, in the performance symbol game performance (variable performance), it is determined whether the ready-to-win performance is to be executed, the case where the ready-to-win performance is not to be executed, etc. A fluctuating performance that executes (includes) a reach performance is also referred to as a "fluctuating performance with reach", and a fluctuating performance that does not (does not include) a reach performance is also referred to as a "fluctuating performance without reach".

In addition, the reach effect is, for example, a display mode of the effect pattern 8 when the result of the special symbol validity judgment indicates a jackpot, in which three effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same (double number). In the case where a mode (winning symbol arrangement, special display mode) is provided, two of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (for example, the left production symbol 8L and the right production symbol 8R) are the winning symbol arrangement ( A state in which the symbols (also referred to as "reach symbol" or "reach mode") constituting the special display mode) are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped), and the remaining one (for example, medium performance symbol 8C) continues to be displayed in a variable manner ( (Also referred to as "reach state"), it refers to an effect that indicates whether or not the remaining effect symbol will be stopped and displayed as a symbol that completes the winning symbol arrangement. According to this reach effect, it is possible to effectively arouse the expectations of players aiming for a jackpot. The reach effect performed on the display screen 7a is a type of display effect.

The variable production pattern includes not only the variation mode of the production pattern 8, but also the execution mode (production pattern) of display effects, sound effects, light effects, variable effects, etc. that are executed in conjunction with the variable display of the effect pattern 8. , whether or not to perform these effects is also determined (S4505). Therefore, it can be said that variable effects include display effects, sound effects, light effects, variable effects, etc. that are executed in conjunction with variable effects.

In addition, in S4505, based on the random number for effect design determination obtained in S4501 and a stop pattern determination table (not shown), the effect pattern 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as "stop effect pattern") is determined and set. The stop performance symbols constitute the ready-to-reach symbols, the winning symbol array, the losing symbol array, etc. of the performance symbol 8. The types of stop display include a fixed stop display (simply referred to as "determined stop") in which the production pattern 8 is definitely stopped and displayed, and a temporary stop display (simply referred to as "fixed stop") before the production pattern 8 is definitively stopped and displayed. (Also called "temporary suspension.")

Temporary stopping means that the fluctuating display (for example, scrolling display) of the production pattern 8 is once stopped (paused), and the production pattern 8 is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position on the display screen 7a. . The temporarily stopped performance pattern can be displayed in a slightly moving state or in a stationary state. When the three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the order of the first stop symbol, second stop symbol, and third stop symbol before the end of the variable display, the stop display of each symbol also corresponds to temporary stop. . On the other hand, a fixed stop means that the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 8 has ended and the performance symbol 8 is displayed in a completely still state at a predetermined stop position (for example, the performance symbol display area 7b) on the display screen 7a. It means that. When the performance symbol 8 is fixed and stopped after being fluctuated, the display result of the fluctuating display (result of the fluctuating performance) is definitively displayed (determined display) (derived display). Therefore, the temporary stop of the effect pattern 8 can be performed once or multiple times until it reaches a fixed stop.

The stop effect symbols determined (selected) in S4505 are a symbol that temporarily stops (also referred to as a "temporary stop symbol") and a symbol that permanently stops (also referred to as a "determined stop symbol"). For example, if the performance symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed (determined stop) as a result of a variable performance, that is, the determined stop symbol, is a miss when the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a miss with a reach, then "787" etc. If it is a non-reaching result, it is considered to be a ``reach-out hit'' or ``reach pattern arrangement.'' (Also referred to as "design arrangement.")

In addition, in the low probability low base state, if the result of the special symbol validity judgment (first special symbol validity judgment) is a jackpot, and the jackpot is a 5R jackpot (general jackpot), the fixed stop symbol of production pattern 8 is "777 ”, and if it is a 10R first jackpot (general jackpot), the confirmed stop symbol of production pattern 8 is the zero of “777”. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol validity determination (second special symbol validity determination) is a jackpot in the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state, and the jackpot is the 10R 9th jackpot (general jackpot), the production symbol The confirmed stop pattern of 8 is the zero (winning pattern arrangement) of a number pattern other than "777", and if it is the 10R 8th jackpot (general jackpot), the confirmed stop symbol of production pattern 8 is the zero of "777". It is said that In this way, the number zero of "777" is the confirmed result of the 10R probability variable jackpot, which can be said to be the most advantageous jackpot for the player.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol validity judgment (first special symbol validity judgment) in the low probability low base state is a jackpot, and the jackpot is any of the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots (special jackpot), the production symbol The confirmed stop symbol of 8 is a specific winning combination among the winning combinations. This particular winning pattern notifies the winning (occurrence) of a special jackpot by a symbol arrangement similar to the losing symbol arrangement, and is a type of winning symbol arrangement (special display mode). A specific random pattern is also called a "special pattern arrangement."

For example, a specific number (special symbol arrangement) is a number consisting of an order such as "123" or "567", or a red symbol with non-identical three digits such as "373" or "773" (3 , 7), etc., it can be constructed by a pattern arrangement with some kind of regularity. Further, it is possible to configure a symbol arrangement in which at least one of the three performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (for example, the medium performance symbol 8C) is a symbol that is not normally displayed.

Note that the above-described stop display mode (symbol arrangement) of the performance symbols 8 is only an example, and what is displayed as the stop performance symbols can be changed as appropriate. Further, the temporary stop symbol and the confirmed stop symbol determined in S4505 may constitute the same stop display mode or different stop display modes. If the temporary stop symbol is different from the confirmed stop symbol, the final stop symbol should be configured so that it is finally stopped and displayed after the temporary stop is displayed in a variable manner (re-variation display, re-variation effect), etc. I can do it.

Further, in S4505, the determination symbol 8s (also referred to as "stop determination symbol") to be stopped and displayed in the determination symbol display area 7c is determined and set. The type of stop display of the judgment symbol 8s is only a confirmed stop display (determined stop). As described above, the judgment symbol 8s displays a variable display in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and a stop display in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and mainly indicates the fluctuation status of the special symbol. This is because it functions as a pattern. Therefore, the stop determination symbol set in S4505 is a symbol that will definitely stop (determined stop symbol). In this embodiment, a fixed stop symbol having the same pattern (number pattern) arrangement as the fixed stop symbol of the effect pattern 8 is set as the fixed stop symbol of the judgment pattern 8s.

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of modes (variable performance patterns) such as a normal reach performance and a super reach performance as variations of the performance symbols 8 (variable performance patterns). In S4505, it is determined which of these effects to perform or not to perform (this is also referred to as "normal variation") based on the variation effect pattern determination table. Hereinafter, normal reach may be referred to as "NM reach", and super reach may be referred to as "SP reach".

For example, when a variable effect with reach is executed, any of the ready-to-reach effects is set based on the variable pattern designation command and the variable effect pattern determination table. Here, when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, it is set so that the possibility of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the NM ready-to-reach effect is executed. In other words, it can be said that the SP reach performance is a game performance with a higher possibility of a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) compared to the NM reach performance.

In this embodiment, as a variation pattern specification command from the main control board 80, the sub control board 90 receives a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern with a variation time of 30,000 ms (30 seconds) or more (see FIG. 9). In this case, a reach effect (variable effect with reach) may be set (executed) based on the command. If the variation time is 30,000ms (30 seconds), the NM reach effect is set (executed) as the reach effect, and if the variation time is 45,000ms (45 seconds) or more, the SP reach effect is set as the reach effect. (execute) to be carried out. A variable performance in which the SP reach effect is not executed and the NM reach effect is executed (not including the SP reach effect) is also referred to as "NM reach variation effect", and the SP reach effect is executed (including the SP reach effect). The variable effect is also referred to as the "SP reach variable effect," and the NM reach variable effect and the SP reach variable effect are collectively referred to as the "reach variable effect."

In this embodiment, a plurality of performance patterns (reach performance patterns) are provided for each of the NM reach performance and the SP reach performance, and one of them is provided depending on the variable time (30,000 ms or more) in which the reach performance can be performed. A production pattern is set (executed). Note that the types (number) of reach performances (reach performance patterns) can be arbitrarily determined.

Here, the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 8 is basically performed as follows. First, when the special symbol propriety determination is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner accordingly. Then, the fluctuation speed of the three performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes almost constant at high speed, and when a predetermined time (for example, 9 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the first stop symbol (in this example, the left performance symbol 8L) The fluctuation speed decreases and the first stop symbol stops (temporarily stops). Next, the fluctuation speed of the second stop symbol (in this example, the right effect symbol 8R) decreases, the second stop symbol stops (temporary stop), and finally the third stop symbol (in this example, the middle effect symbol The fluctuation speed of 8C) decreases and the third stop symbol stops (temporarily stops). Thereafter, the three performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, and one time of the variable display ends. Normal fluctuations, reach effects, etc. are performed based on the flow from the start to the end of such a fluctuation display.

Specifically, for example, when the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function according to the number of reserved balls or the game state is not activated (when the fluctuation time shortening function is not activated), the three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R When starts the fluctuating display, the left production symbol 8L (first stop symbol) stops (temporary stop) at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 9 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the variation, followed by the right production symbol 8R. (Second stop symbol) stops (temporary stop). At this time, if the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R stop (temporarily stop) with the same numerical symbols (ready-to-reach mode), a ready-to-win performance is established, and then a ready-to-win performance (NM ready-to-win performance or SP ready-to-win performance) is executed. In the case of the SP reach performance, the SP reach performance is executed after the NM reach performance (the NM reach performance develops into the SP reach performance).

On the other hand, if the reach is not established when the left and right production symbols 8L and 8R stop (temporary stop) (in other words, if it is a normal fluctuation), the right production symbol 8R (second stop symbol) stops (temporary stop). Subsequently, the middle production symbol 8C (third stop symbol) stops (temporarily stops). In this example, in the normal variation, the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the effect pattern 8 until the third stop pattern (in this example, the medium effect pattern 8C) stops (temporary stop) is approximately 11 seconds. . However, in the normal variation when the special symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the time it takes from the start of the variation display until the left production symbol 8L (first stop symbol) stops (temporary stop) is normally (variation The time taken for the right effect symbol 8R (second stop symbol) and middle effect symbol 8C (third stop symbol) to stop (temporary stop) is also shorter than the time reduction function (when the time reduction function is not activated). Becomes shorter.

In addition, depending on the variable performance pattern set in S4505 and the preview performance pattern set in S4506 described later, for example, after the start of the variable display of the performance pattern 8, the three performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed at the same time. The order and timing of the stop display of production symbols, such as stopping all at once (temporary stop), or all symbols continuing to fluctuate even after a predetermined time (for example, 9 seconds) until the first stop symbol stops, etc. may differ from the aspect described above.

Next, in S4506, processing related to the setting of the notice performance (notice performance setting processing) is performed (S4506). The notice performance is a performance that suggests the currently executed variable display or the stored reserved (variable display to be executed later), for example, a performance that suggests the possibility (expected jackpot) that the display result of the currently executed variable display will be a specific display result (or special display result), or a performance that suggests the possibility (expected jackpot) that the display result of the later executed variable display will be a specific display result (or special display result). In this embodiment, various notice performances can be executed, such as a notice performance based on the reserved performance information (pre-determination result) stored in S4395 (also called "reserved pre-read notice") and a notice performance related to the current (this time) variable display (also called "relevant change") (also called "relevant change notice"), and multiple notice performance patterns are provided corresponding to this. In S4506, it is determined whether or not to execute each notice performance (execution yes/no), and the execution pattern (notice performance pattern) of the notice performance to be executed is set.

Specifically, based on the random number for determining the preview performance obtained in S4501 and the preview performance determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, whether or not to execute the preview performance and the preview performance pattern are determined. A preview performance pattern is set based on the determination result. Further, it is also possible to set a preview performance pattern based on the variable performance pattern set in S4505 or the performance pending information (prior determination result) stored in S4395.

The ROM of the sub-control board 90 stores in advance a preview effect determination table corresponding to the types of preview effects that can be executed in the pachinko game machine 1. The preview performance is performed, for example, by displaying on the display screen 7a an image (also referred to as a "notice image" or "notice information") that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot (also referred to as a "notice display"). Further, in addition to the display effect (notice display), the notice effect can also be performed by sound effect, light effect, and movable effect, and it is also possible to perform by a combination of these effects. Further, the change notice can also be made based on the preliminary determination result of special drawing reservation.

The preview performance setting process (S4506) is triggered by the start of the fluctuating display (fluctuating performance) of the performance symbol 8, and sets a preview performance (pending preview preview, The preview performance related to the processing here does not include a pending icon notice (a type of pending preview notice) accompanying the occurrence of a starting ball. That is, the process related to setting a pending icon notice accompanying the occurrence of a starting ball is performed not in the notice performance setting process (S4506) but in the pending icon notice process (S4400), which will be described later.

Here, the preview performance (pending pre-reading notice) that is executed based on the production pending information (pre-reading information) is also referred to as "pre-reading production", and is executed based on the special drawing 1 performance pending information (first pre-reading information). The preview performance executed based on the special map 2 performance pending information (second pre-read information) is also referred to as the "second pre-read performance".

The storage content of the performance pending information stored in S4395 (the storage content of the performance pending information storage area) and the result of the special symbol validity judgment identified by the analysis result of the fluctuation start command in S4502 (this special symbol fluctuation display The notice performance pattern set in S4506, based on the variation pattern information of the special symbol (variation pattern and stop symbol related to the current special symbol variation display), which is also specified by the analysis result of the variation start command (result of the appropriateness judgment), , the type (notice type) and mode of the preview performance to be executed, the presence or absence of the preview performance, etc. will be different. When performing a preview performance at a certain time, one of the multiple preview performances (one type of preview performance) may be performed, or two or more preview performances (multiple types of preview performances) may be performed at the same time. It may be carried out from time to time.

In this embodiment, a preview performance (also referred to as a "gimmick preview") using the variable performance member 14 is provided as a preview performance that can be executed based on the preview performance pattern set in S4506. The gimmick preview presentation patterns (also referred to as "gimmick notice patterns") include a pattern using only the left variable presentation member 14L, a pattern using only the right variable presentation member 14R, and a pattern using only the left variable presentation member 14L and the right variable presentation. There are patterns that use both members 14R, and a plurality of gimmick preview patterns based on these patterns are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90.

In this embodiment, when the variable effect pattern set in S4505 is a variable effect pattern of SP reach variable effect (a variable effect pattern with a variation time of 45,000 ms or more), or if the variable effect pattern set in S4505 is a variable effect pattern with a variation time of 45,000 ms or more, or when the special figure hold (variable It is assumed that the gimmick notice can be executed when the acquisition information (obtained information for a time of 45000 ms or more) is stored. When the production control microcomputer 91 determines in S4506 to execute a gimmick notice, it determines (selects) a pattern to be executed from among the plurality of gimmick notice patterns stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and selects this pattern. (S4506).

The gimmick notice pattern includes the operation pattern of the variable performance member 14, and when the gimmick notice pattern is set in S4506, the variable performance member 14 is activated according to the operation pattern of the variable performance member 14 included in the gimmick notice pattern. Drive data for operating the is created in the above-mentioned S4305. The created drive data is output in accordance with the operation timing of the variable presentation member 14 (gimmick notification execution timing) specified by the gimmick notice pattern (S4203), so that the variable presentation member 14 is activated (gimmick (The notice is executed). Details of the gimmick preview will be discussed later.

Next, in S4507, a variable effect start command for starting a variable effect based on the variable effect pattern set in S4505 and the preview effect pattern set in S4506 is set in the sub output buffer (S4507), and the variable effect start process is executed. Finish. When the variable effect start command set in S4507 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 transmits the variable effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, that is, S4505 Predetermined image data for variable effects corresponding to the variable effect pattern set in (image data indicating start of variation, in progress of variation, stop of variation, etc. of effect pattern 8) and a preview effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command. That is, the predetermined preview performance image data corresponding to the preview performance pattern set in S4506 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the image display device 7 displays the variable performance, preview performance, etc. based on the read image data. Execute on screen 7a. In addition, a variable display of the determination symbol 8s displayed in the determination symbol display area 7c is also executed. Furthermore, according to the variable performance pattern and preview performance pattern specified based on the variable performance start command, various performance devices (speakers 67, board lamps 5, (frame lamp 66, variable effect member 14, etc.).

[Pending icon notice processing]
Next, a description will be given of the pending icon notification process (S4400) that is executed based on the reception of the start ball entry command from the main control board 80 (YES in S4390). As shown in FIG. 43, in the pending icon notification process (S4400), first, it is determined whether the pending icon notification flag is OFF (S4601).

The hold icon notice flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the hold icon notice is being executed. When executing the hold icon notice, it is turned ON in S4605 described later, and the special figure hold that triggered the execution of the hold icon notice. (Also referred to as "notice target pending".) It is turned off based on the end of the variable display (variable game) corresponding to. Therefore, if the performance hold displayed in the preview display mode in the performance hold display area (the first performance hold display area 9c or the second performance hold display area 9d) moves to the variable hold display area 9e, the performance hold (notice) Until the variable display (variable game) corresponding to the target pending (target pending) ends, a new performance pending is displayed (additional display) in the performance pending display area (first performance pending display area 9c, second performance pending display area 9d) Even if it is, a new performance hold will not be displayed in the preview display mode. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel hopeful about hitting the jackpot with respect to the variable game that is currently being executed.

In addition, the pending icon preview may be turned off with the start of the variable display (variable game) corresponding to the special figure pending that triggered the execution of the pending icon preview (expiration of the special pattern pending). In this case, while the performance hold is displayed in the preview display mode in the variable hold display area 9e, it is newly displayed (additional display ) can be displayed in a preview display mode, creating expectations among players for the variable game that corresponds to the subsequent special figure hold (notice target hold) in addition to the currently running variable game. becomes possible.

If it is determined in S4601 that the pending icon preview flag is not OFF (ON) (NO in S4601), the pending icon preview flag is currently being executed, so the process ends without performing the processing from S4602 onwards. For this reason, in this embodiment, while the pending icon preview is being executed, the pending icon preview targeting the newly stored (additionally stored) special figure pending (later special figure pending) is not executed. That is, two or more performance holds in the preview display mode are never displayed in the performance hold display area. Note that the reservation icon preview flag may not be provided, and the reservation icon notice for the later special figure reservation may be made executable during the execution of the reservation icon notice. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which two or more performance holds in the preview display mode can be displayed in the performance hold display area.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S4601 that the pending icon notice flag is OFF (YES in S4601), a determination (lottery) is made as to whether or not to execute the pending icon notice (S4602). In this embodiment, when the gaming state is a low probability low base state, that is, when it is a low base state in which the variable display of the first special symbol (also referred to as "first variable game") is mainly executed, It is configured such that a pending icon notice (also referred to as "first pending icon notice") by the first performance pending 9a can be executed. In addition, when the gaming state is a low probability high base state and a high probability high base state, that is, the high base where the variable display of the second special symbol (also referred to as "second variable game") is mainly executed. In this case, the system is configured such that a pending icon notice (also referred to as a "second pending icon notice") by the second effect pending 9b can be executed. Correspondingly, in S4602, if the current gaming state is a low base state, it is determined whether or not to execute the first pending icon notice, and if the current gaming state is a high base state, it is determined whether or not to execute the first pending icon notice. It is determined whether or not to execute the icon preview.

The determination as to whether or not to execute the pending icon preview (also referred to as "determining whether to execute the pending icon preview") can be performed, for example, based on a pending icon preview execution determination table (not shown). Specifically, for example, a random number (for example, "0 to 99") for determining the execution of a pending icon notice is provided as a random number for determining the performance, one value is randomly obtained from the random number, and the obtained value (the pending icon notice This can be done by determining the execution determination random number value) based on the pending icon advance notice execution determination table. The random number value for determining execution of a pending icon preview can be obtained, for example, at the timing when a starting ball entry command is received (S4390) or at the timing when determining whether to perform a pending icon preview (S4602).

As a result of the determination in S4602, if the pending icon notice is not executed (NO in S4603), this process ends without performing the processes after S4604, and if the pending icon notice is executed (YES in S4603), the pending icon notice is executed. A pattern (also referred to as a "pending icon notice pattern") is set (S4604).

The pending icon notice pattern defines various conditions for executing the pending icon notice, such as the display timing when displaying the pending icon in the notice display mode, the type of notice display mode, the number of changes (the number of pending changes), etc. be. The display timing of the preview display mode is, for example, when a starting ball arrives (when a new holding icon is displayed with the starting ball entering), or when a special figure reservation is stored before the preview target reservation (also known as "preceding reservation"). ), when the display position of the hold icon corresponding to the preview target hold on the performance hold display area moves (shifts) in the direction of decreasing the number of holds, the hold icon corresponding to the preview target hold changes to the performance hold display area. For example, when the icon moves from to the variable hold display area (changes to an active hold icon).

In S4604, if it is determined to execute the first pending icon notice in the pending icon notice execution determination (S4602), the execution pattern of the first pending icon notice (also referred to as "first pending icon notice pattern") is determined. If it is determined to execute the second pending icon notice, an execution pattern for the second pending icon notice (also referred to as a "second pending icon notice pattern") is set. The first pending icon notice pattern and the second pending icon notice pattern are also collectively referred to as a "holding icon notice pattern."

The pending icon notice pattern set in S4604 can be determined (selected) based on, for example, a pending icon notice pattern determination table (not shown). Specifically, for example, a random number for determining a pending icon notice pattern (for example, "0 to 99") is provided as a random number for determining a performance, one value is randomly obtained from the random number, and the obtained value (as a pending icon notice pattern) is provided. A pattern to be executed is determined (selected) from among a plurality of predetermined pending icon preview patterns by determining the random number value for pattern determination based on the pending icon preview pattern determination table. The random number value for determining the hold icon preview pattern can be obtained, for example, at the timing when the starting ball entry command is received (S4390) or at the timing when the hold icon preview pattern is determined (S4604).

After setting the pending icon notice pattern in S4064, the pending icon notice flag is turned ON (S4605). Then, a pending icon preview command that instructs execution of a pending icon preview based on the pending icon preview pattern set in S4604 is set in the sub-output buffer (S4606), and the process ends.

When the pending icon preview command set in S4606 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 transmits the pending icon preview pattern specified based on the received pending icon preview command, i.e. Image data for a pending icon preview (effect pending image data, etc.) corresponding to the pending icon preview pattern set in S4604 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and a pending icon preview based on the read image data is displayed on the image display device 7. This is executed on the display screen 7a (effect pending display area, variable pending display area).

The operation (control processing) of the production control microcomputer 91 has been explained above, but below, when the gimmick notice pattern is set in S4506 mentioned above, the gimmick notice (gimmick production) that is executed based on the gimmick notice pattern is explained below. ) will be explained below.

[Example 1 of production]
The gimmick notice of production example 1 (also referred to as the "first gimmick notice") is a type of pending change notice (the relevant variable notice) that targets the performance pending (active pending icon) displayed in the variable pending display area 9e. It is. Specifically, when changing the display mode of the active pending icon displayed in the variable pending display area 9e (see FIG. 3) to a display mode (notice display mode) different from normal (normal display mode), the left variable effect is used. The member 14L is actuated to produce an effect on how the active hold icon changes. In this embodiment, the first gimmick preview is executed (the first gimmick is It is now possible to set a gimmick notice pattern related to the notice.

FIG. 45(A) shows the display screen 7a and its surroundings when the variable performance accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol (variable game) is started in response to the setting of the gimmick notice pattern (S4506). ing. As shown in the figure, when the variable effect is started, the effect pattern 8 and the judgment pattern 8s start to be displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a. At this time, in the variable pending display area 9e, the first effect pending 9a corresponding to the first special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner, that is, the effect pending (active pending icon) corresponding to the consumed first special symbol is displayed. Displayed in normal display mode. In addition, the variable effect member 14 is in an upright state (standby state) at the starting point position (see FIG. 44), and is hidden behind the cover members (left cover member 17L, right cover member 17R) and difficult to see from the front. (not visible) state (also referred to as "second state").

After the start of the fluctuating performance, as shown in FIG. The variable performance member 14L rotates to the right (clockwise) and enters a tilted state. As a result, the flag portion 14aL of the left variable performance member 14L appears in front of the variable pending display area 9e (predetermined display area) of the display screen 7a, and the active pending icon (variable pending display area 9e) appears behind the flag portion 14aL. It becomes a hidden state. That is, a state (also referred to as a "first state") is generated in which at least a portion of the left variable effect member 14L (flag portion 14aL) is visible. At this time, the flag portion 14aL of the left variable effect member 14L is in a state where it overlaps with the variation pending display area 9e of the display screen 7a (also referred to as a "superimposed state"), and the flag portion 14aL of the left variable effect member 14L is visible from the front. Therefore, the active hold icon (fluctuation hold display area 9e) is difficult to see (not visible) from the front.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46(A), when the left production symbol 8L (first stop symbol) and the right production symbol 8R stop (temporarily stop) at the reach symbol (when the reach is established), they will tilt at the starting point position until then. The left variable performance member 14L (see FIG. 45(B)), which was in the state, rotates to the left (counterclockwise) and becomes the upright state, and the left variable performance member 14L (flag portion 14aL) becomes the left cover member. It will be hidden behind 17L. That is, a state (also referred to as a "second state") occurs in which the visibility of at least a portion of the left variable effect member 14L (flag portion 14aL) is lower than the first state. At this time, the flag part 14aL of the left variable performance member 14L is in a state where it does not overlap with the variation pending display area 9e of the display screen 7a (also referred to as a "non-overlapping state"), and the left variable performance member 14L (flag part 14aL) is The active hold icon (fluctuating hold display area 9e) is hidden behind the cover member 17L and difficult to see from the front (invisible), but becomes visible from the front, and the active hold icon that has become visible is in a preview display mode. is displayed. In other words, the display mode of the active hold icon changes from the normal display mode to the preview display mode by executing the first gimmick notice.

In the present production example 1, three types of display modes are provided as preview display modes of the active hold icon that can be displayed in the first gimmick preview, as shown in FIG. 46(B). Specifically, there are two display modes: a display mode that resembles one person (also referred to as the "first preview display mode"), and a display mode that mimics three people (also referred to as the "second preview display mode"). , a display mode simulating four people raising their hands (also referred to as a "third preview display mode").

In this performance example 1, the relationship between the jackpot expectation of the first to third preview display modes is such that the third preview display mode is highest, and then the second preview display mode and the first preview display mode decrease in that order. It is composed of In other words, when the variable production in which the first gimmick notice is executed is a variation production accompanying jackpot variation (also referred to as "jackpot variation production"), the appearance rate of the third notice display mode is the highest, and hereafter, the second notice display mode has the highest appearance rate. The appearance rate is configured to decrease in the order of the preview display mode and the first preview display mode. On the other hand, if the variation performance in which the first gimmick notice is executed is a variation production accompanied by an error variation (also referred to as a "missing variation production"), the appearance rate of the first notice display mode is highest, and hereafter, the second notice display mode has the highest appearance rate. The appearance rate is configured to decrease in the order of the preview display mode and the third preview display mode. The appearance rate of each preview display mode can be determined by a preview performance determination table (not shown) that is referred to when setting a preview performance pattern (gimmick preview pattern) in S4506 described above.

When the first gimmick notice is executed in this way, the active pending icon currently displayed in the variable pending display area 9e is covered by the flag portion 14aL of the left variable performance member 14L, making it difficult to see (not visible). After reaching this state, it becomes visible (visible) in a preview display mode. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to what display mode (notice display mode) the active pending icon covered (hidden) by the flag portion 14aL of the left variable performance member 14L will reappear. becomes.

In addition, in the first gimmick preview, the timing at which the left variable performance member 14L changes from the upright state to the tilted state and the timing at which the left variable performance member 14L changes from the tilted state to the upright state (that is, the operation timing of the left variable performance member 14L) are as described above. For example, the timing of changing from a standing state (standby state) to a leaning state is the reach establishment timing, and the timing of changing from a leaning state to a standing state is the start timing of SP reach effect (SP reach development). The timing can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, the types (number) of preview display modes of the active hold icon displayed by the first gimmick preview are not limited to the three types shown in this example 1 (see FIG. 46(B)). , it is possible to have two or less types or four or more types, and the contents of the preview display mode can also be changed as appropriate.

[Example 2 of production]
The gimmick notice of production example 2 (also referred to as "second gimmick notice") is executed from the start of the variable production until the first stop symbol (left production symbol 8L) stops (temporary stop). It is. When the variable presentation accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol (variable game) is started in response to the setting of the gimmick notice pattern (S4506), as shown in FIG. 47(A), the left variable presentation member 14L is in the upright state. The right variable presentation member 14R moves (raises) from the starting point position to the intermediate point position (see FIG. 44) while remaining in the upright position. At this time, the left variable effect member 14L is hidden behind the left cover member 17L, the right variable effect member 14R is hidden behind the right cover member 17R (at the rear of the upper right part of the center decorative body 10), and each variable effect is hidden behind the right cover member 17R. It is difficult (impossible) to visually recognize the entire members 14L and 14R from the front. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp the current position of the left and right variable effect members 14L, 14R.

When the left variable performance member 14L reaches the intermediate point position, the left variable performance member 14L rotates to the right (clockwise direction) and enters a tilted state, as shown in FIG. 47(B). As a result, the flag portion 14aL of the left variable effect member 14L appears in front of the left middle region (predetermined display region) of the display screen 7a, and the region is hidden behind the flag portion 14aL. That is, a state (first state) is generated in which at least a portion of the left variable effect member 14L (flag portion 14aL) is visible. At this time, the flag portion 14aL of the left variable effect member 14L is in a state (superimposed state) in which it overlaps the left center area of the display screen 7a, and the flag portion 14aL of the left variable effect member 14L is visible from the front, and the display screen 7a The central left region of the vehicle is difficult to see (not visible) from the front.

When the right variable performance member 14R reaches the end position, the right variable performance member 14R rotates to the left (counterclockwise direction) and enters a tilted state, as shown in FIG. 47(B). As a result, the flag portion 14aR of the right variable presentation member 14R appears in front of the upper right area (predetermined display area) of the display screen 7a, and the area is hidden behind the flag portion 14aR. That is, a state (first state) is generated in which at least a portion of the right variable effect member 14R (flag portion 14aR) is visible. At this time, the flag portion 14aR of the right variable presentation member 14R is in a state where it overlaps with the upper right area of the display screen 7a (superimposed state), and the flag portion 14aR of the right variable presentation member 14R is visible from the front, and the display screen 7a The upper right area of is difficult to see (not visible) from the front.

Here, in this embodiment, since the determination symbol display region 7c is provided in the upper right region of the display screen 7a, when the upper right region of the display screen 7a is hidden behind the flag portion 14aR, the determination symbol The determination pattern 8s displayed in the display area 7c becomes difficult to see (not visible) from the front. Therefore, when the right variable performance member 14R changes from the upright state to the tilted state at the end point position during the variable performance (during the variable game), the display position of the judgment symbol 8s during the variable display will change with the change to the tilted state. (Determination symbol display area 7c) moves from the upper right area to the lower right area of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 47(B)). Thereby, even if the right variable performance member 14R is in a tilted state at the end position, the visibility of the determination symbol 8s is ensured, and the player can visually recognize the determination symbol 8s.

In the second gimmick preview, after the left and right variable performance members 14L, 14R are in a tilted state as shown in FIG. 47(B), a reach is established on the display screen 7a during the variable performance, which develops into an SP reach. At the timing (SP reach development timing), as shown in FIG. ) is displayed in a predetermined performance display area including at least the center of the display screen 7a, and as the development suggestion performance starts to be displayed (in accordance with the SP reach development timing), the left and right variable performance members 14L , 14R actuate (rotate) and change from a tilted state to an upright state.

Specifically, the left variable effect member 14L (see FIG. 47(B)), which was in a tilted state at the intermediate point position, rotates to the left (counterclockwise direction) and becomes an upright state, and the left variable effect member 14L (flag portion 14aL) is hidden behind the left cover member 17L (see FIG. 48(A)). Further, the right variable performance member 14R (see FIG. 47(B)), which was in the tilted state at the end position, rotates to the right (clockwise direction) and becomes the upright state, and the right variable performance member 14L (flag portion 14aL) ) is hidden behind the right cover member 17R and the center decorative body 10 (upper right part) (see FIG. 48(A)). That is, a state (second state) occurs in which the visibility of at least part of the left and right variable left effect members 14L, 14R (flag portions 14aL, 14aR) is lower than the first state.

When the left variable effect member 14L is in the upright state (when the second state is generated), the flag portion 14aL of the left variable effect member 14L overlaps with the left middle area of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 48(A). The left variable effect member 14L (flag portion 14aL) is hidden behind the left cover member 17L and is difficult to see from the front (not visible), so that the left center area of the display screen 7a is Visible from the front. At this time, a predetermined preview image 150 is displayed (appears) in the central left region of the display screen 7a that is now visible.

When the right variable performance member 14R is in the upright state (when the second state occurs), the flag portion 14aR of the right variable performance member 14R overlaps with the upper right area of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 48(A). The right variable effect member 14R (flag portion 14aR) is hidden behind the right cover member 17R and the center decorative body 10 (upper right corner) and is difficult to see from the front (not visible). , the upper right area of the display screen 7a becomes visible from the front. At this time, a predetermined preview image 150 is displayed (appears) in the upper right area of the display screen 7a that is now visible.

In the second gimmick preview, the preview image 150 that is displayed (appears) as the left and right variable performance members 14L and 14R change from the tilted state to the upright state is the preview performance pattern set in S4506 described above. It is based on In this performance example 2, six types of preview images (notice display modes) are provided as the preview images 150 that can be displayed in the second gimmick preview, as shown in FIG. Specifically, there is a first preview image with one bell design, a second preview image with two bell designs, a third preview image with one cherry design, and a thumbs up. The fourth preview image depicts a design imitating a gesture (thumbs up), the fifth preview image depicts a design imitating the face of a character with heart-shaped eyes, and the third preview image depicts a timer showing the passage of time. 6 preview images (also referred to as "timer images") are provided.

In this production example 2, the relationship between the jackpot expectation level of the first to sixth preview images is that the sixth preview image is the highest, and the following are the fifth preview image, the fourth preview image, the third preview image, and the second preview image. , the first preview image. That is, in the case of a variable performance jackpot variable performance in which the second gimmick preview is executed, the appearance rate of the sixth preview image is the highest, and the following are the fifth preview image, the fourth preview image, the third preview image, and the second preview image. The appearance rate is configured to decrease in the order of the preview image and the first preview image. On the other hand, when the variable performance in which the second gimmick preview is executed is a failed variation performance, the first preview image has the highest appearance rate, and the following are the second preview image, the third preview image, the fourth preview image, and the third preview image. The appearance rate is configured to decrease in the order of the 5th preview image and the 6th preview image. The appearance rate of each preview image can be determined by a preview performance determination table (not shown) that is referred to when setting the preview performance pattern (gimmick preview pattern) in S4506 described above.

In addition, in this production example 2 (second gimmick preview), if the left and right variable production members 14L, 14R are activated and two preview images are displayed, only one sixth preview image can be displayed. , one or two other preview images can be displayed. For example, if two preview images 150 are displayed due to the second gimmick preview, and one of the preview images 150 is the sixth preview image (timer image) as shown in FIG. 48(A). , the remaining one is one of the first to fifth preview images. For example, there is a case where two preview images 150 are displayed due to the second gimmick preview, and one of the preview images 150 is the third preview image (cherry pattern) as shown in FIG. 48(A). In this case, the remaining one is one of the first to sixth preview images, and the same third preview image may be displayed. When two preview images are displayed in this way, the two preview images can be configured to suggest the degree of jackpot expectation. For example, if one is the 6th preview image and the other is the 5th preview image, the expectation level of jackpot may be higher than if both are the 5th preview image, or if one is the 5th preview image If the other is the fourth preview image, the expectation level of the jackpot is higher than if one is the fourth preview image and the other is the third preview image, etc. It is possible to determine the suggested jackpot expectation level based on the relationship between the levels of the jackpot expectation level.

After two of the first to sixth preview images are displayed at the SP reach development timing due to the second gimmick notice, the left and right variable performance members 14L and 14R, which are in the upright state at the SP reach development timing, , and then move (descend) to the respective starting point positions, and when the SP ready-to-reach effect is displayed in a predetermined effect display area including at least the center of the display screen 7a, it is in a standby state as shown in FIG. 48(B). There is. When the sixth preview image is displayed due to the second gimmick preview, the timer displayed by the sixth preview image will display "00:00" until the remaining time reaches "00:00". The display of the sixth preview image continues until the sixth preview image is reached. On the other hand, if a preview image other than the 6th preview image (any of the 1st to 5th preview images) is displayed due to the second gimmick preview, the preview image will be displayed at a predetermined time after the start of display (for example, from the start of display When a predetermined time has elapsed, when the SP reach effect starts, etc.), it is erased from the screen (it is not displayed). Note that the display end timing (erase timing) of the first to fifth preview images may be a predetermined time before the end of the variable effect that is being executed at the time the preview image starts displaying (the variable effect) or a timing when the preview image is displayed. It is possible to set it as any timing during the variable performance, such as a predetermined time before the variable performance based on the special figure reservation that has become completed.

When the timer display indicated by the sixth preview image reaches "00:00", for example, a preview image with a relatively high jackpot expectation among multiple preview images is displayed, or a SP reach effect is displayed. It can be configured such that a performance that further increases the expectation of a jackpot (also referred to as a "high expectation performance") is executed, such as displaying a performance that further increases the expectation of a jackpot (advanced performance). That is, the sixth preview image (timer image) may indicate in a countdown format the remaining time until the highly anticipated performance is executed (started).

In the example shown in FIG. 48(B), the timer displayed by the sixth preview image is "90:00". In this case, the timing at which the timer display indicated by the sixth preview image becomes "00:00" is when the sixth preview image is displayed (when the display of the sixth preview image starts). (variable game), but at least in the next and subsequent variable performances (variable game). This is because the longest variation time of the special symbol in this embodiment is "75000ms (75 seconds)" (see FIG. 9). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 48(B), the sixth preview image is a gimmick preview as a pending preview that suggests that a high expectation level performance will be executed (occurrence) in the next and subsequent variable performances (variable games). This shows the case displayed by .

Note that the contents of the timer (remaining time) shown by the sixth preview image can be changed depending on the variable performance pattern set in S4505 and the preview performance pattern set in S4506. For example, the sixth preview image can be selected from multiple predetermined times such as "15:00," "30:00," "45:00," "60:00," and "90:00." The remaining time to be shown can be determined (selected) and set as a display pattern (a preview effect pattern, a gimmick preview pattern) of the sixth preview image displayed by the gimmick preview. For example, it can be configured such that the longer the remaining time indicated by the sixth preview image, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. This makes it possible to effectively arouse the player's expectations for a jackpot, and to increase interest when the sixth preview image (timer image) is displayed due to the gimmick preview.

When the second gimmick notice is executed in this way, the left and right variable effect members 14L, 14R are activated, and a partial area (predetermined display area) of the display screen 7a is changed to the left and right flag portions 14aL, 14aR. After being covered and becoming difficult to see (not visible), the preview image 150 is displayed (becomes visible) in a partial area. This draws the player's attention to which preview image will be displayed in the partial area on the display screen 7a covered (hidden) by the flag portions 14aL and 14aR of the left and right variable performance members 14L and 14R. becomes possible.

In addition, in the second gimmick notice, the timing when the left and right variable performance members 14L, 14R move from the starting position to the operating position (intermediate position or end position), and the timing when the left and right variable performance members 14L, 14R are in the operating position. The timing at which the left and right variable presentation members 14L, 14R change from the tilted state to the upright state at the operating position, the timing at which the left and right variable presentation members 14L, 14R move from the operating position to the starting position. The operation timings of the left and right variable effect members 14L, 14R, such as the (return) timing, are not limited to the timings described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, during the period from the start of the variable performance to the establishment of reach, the left variable performance member 14L moves from the starting position to the operating position, reciprocating rotation (state change) between the upright state and the tilted state in the operating position, and The movement of the variable performance member 14L from the operating position to the starting position is performed (that is, the gimmick performance by the left variable performance member 14L is completed), and the right Movement of the variable presentation member 14R from the starting position to the operating position (intermediate position or end position), reciprocating rotation (state change) between the upright state and the tilted state, and the movement of the right variable presentation member 14R from the operating position to the starting position The left variable performance member 14L and the right variable performance member 14R may be operated at mutually different timings, such that the movement is performed (that is, the gimmick performance by the right variable performance member 14R is completed). .

In addition, the types (number) of preview images displayed by the second gimmick preview are not limited to the six types (see Figure 49) shown in the second production example, but may be five or less, or seven types. It is possible to do the above, and the contents of the preview image can also be changed as appropriate.

Above, we have explained two (two types) production examples (production examples 1 and 2) as typical examples of gimmick notices (gimmick productions). The present invention is not limited to 2, and various other types of gimmick notices (gimmick effects) can be provided. For example, only the left variable presentation member 14L is moved from the starting position to the operating position (intermediate position or end point position), and the left variable presentation member 14L in the operating position is reciprocated between the upright state and the tilted state. After displaying a preview image at After displaying a preview image by reciprocating the right variable presentation member 14R in the operating position between the upright state and the tilted state, move the right variable presentation member 14R to the starting point position. It is possible to provide further gimmick notices, such as providing a gimmick notice of a pattern (fourth gimmick notice).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production examples 1 and 2, the number of times the variable production member 14 (left variable production member 14L, right variable production member 14R) at the starting position or operating position is rotated back and forth between the upright state and the tilted state. Although the rotation is performed once, a pattern of reciprocating rotation twice or more may be provided. In this case, the preview image (notice display mode) that is displayed (visible) when the variable effect member 14 changes from the upright state to the tilted state and becomes the upright state (one reciprocating rotation is completed) is It may be configured to be able to change each time a reciprocating rotation is performed (each time one reciprocating rotation is completed). In this way, it becomes possible to create a more varied preview performance (gimmick preview).

In addition, a starting point, an intermediate point, and an end point are provided within the movement range of the variable effect member 14 defined by the guide hole 142 (see FIG. 44), and the variable effect member 14 is stopped at each position to stand up. However, the positions where the variable effect member 14 stops (positions where reciprocating rotation is possible) are not limited to three, but may be one, two, or four or more positions. It can be changed as appropriate depending on the length of the movement range. In addition, the left variable effect member 14L (guide hole 142L) and the right variable effect member 14R (guide hole 142R) can determine the stopping position within the movement range (the position of reciprocating rotation between the upright state and the tilted state). It may be different. This allows for a variety of gimmick performances.

[Effects of Example 1]
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, the guide holes 142 (142L, 142R) are provided on the left and right sides of the frame 141 on the front side of the display screen 7a that can display various performance images. The variable performance members 14 (14L, 14R) are movable within a vertical movement range (one form of "within a predetermined range") allowed by (see FIG. 44). Then, when the variable effect member 14 is located at the starting point position, intermediate point position, or end point position (one form of "predetermined position") within the movement range, the flag portion 14a (14aL, 14aR) of the variable effect member 14 is The flag portion 14a may become visible from the front (an aspect of the "first state"), or become difficult to see (not visible) from the front (an aspect of the "second state"). Therefore, it is possible to cause a change not only in the position of the variable presentation member 14 (flag portion 14a) but also in the visibility state of the variable presentation member 14 (flag portion 14a) at the starting point position, intermediate point position, or end point position. becomes. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the presentation of the performance (gimmick performance) using the variable performance member 14 and improve the interest.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment, the predetermined position at which the visible state (first state, second state) of the variable performance member 14 that is displaced within the movement range described above can be changed is within the movement range. It will exist in one or more places. Therefore, especially when there are a plurality of predetermined positions, the effects using the variable effect member 14 will be more varied. This makes it possible to further improve interest.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the flag portion 14aL of the left variable performance member 14L is a partial area of the display screen 7a (variable pending display area 9e, middle left area or upper left area, "predetermined display area"). The left variable effect member 14L is capable of reciprocating rotation (see FIG. 44, FIG. 45, FIG. 46(A), FIG. 47, FIG. 48, etc.). In addition, a superimposed state (tilted state) in which the flag portion 14aR of the right variable presentation member 14R overlaps a partial area of the display screen 7a (lower right area, middle right area, or upper right area, one aspect of the "predetermined display area"). The right variable presentation member 14R is allowed to reciprocate between the state and the non-overlapping state (standing state) in which the flag portion 14aR does not overlap a partial area (predetermined display area) of the display screen 7a (FIG. 44, (See FIG. 45, FIG. 46(A), FIG. 47, FIG. 48, etc.).

In a state where the flag portion 14a of the variable effect member 14 is visible from the front (first state, tilted state), the variable effect member 14 (flag portion 14a) is in a superimposed state where it overlaps a partial area of the display screen 7a. Therefore, various images such as active hold icons and preview images displayed in a partial area of the display screen 7a are hidden behind the variable presentation member 14 (flag portion 14a) and are difficult to see from the front (see FIG. 45). B), see FIG. 47(B), etc.). On the other hand, in a state (second state, standing state) in which the flag portion 14a of the variable presentation member 14 is difficult to see (not visible) from the front, the variable presentation member 14 (flag portion 14a) is in a partial area of the display screen 7a. Since the display screen 7a is in a non-overlapping state where it does not overlap, various images such as active hold icons and preview images displayed in a partial area of the display screen 7a are not hidden behind the variable presentation member 14 (flag section 14a) and are easily visible from the front. (See FIG. 46(A), FIG. 48(A), etc.). Therefore, it is possible to change the visibility state of the image displayed in a partial area of the display screen 7a in accordance with the state of the variable effect member 14 (flag section 14a). This makes it possible to further improve the interest when the performance is performed using the variable performance member 14.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the variable performance member 14 is in a non-overlapping state where it does not overlap with a partial area of the display screen 7a, the front side of the variable performance member 14 is connected to the cover member 17 (17L, 17R). (See FIG. 45(A), etc.). Therefore, when the variable performance member 14 is in the non-overlapping state, it becomes possible to make the variable performance member 14 difficult to visually recognize from the player side. This makes it possible to give the player a visual impact when the variable effect member 14 changes from the non-superimposed state to the superimposed state (that is, when the first state occurs).

In addition, in the first embodiment, the variable effect member was constructed of a shaped object with a flag as a motif, but the configuration, form, etc. of the variable effect member are not limited to the first example. The configuration, form, etc. are not particularly limited as long as they can be displaced within a predetermined range in front of the display screen and can change the visibility state (visibility) from the front.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the variable effect member rotates in the left and right direction (reciprocating rotation), but the operating mode of the variable effect member is not limited to rotation, and includes variable effects such as sliding, sliding, and rolling. Any operating mode may be used as long as it corresponds to the configuration (structure) of the member, and two or more operating modes may be combined.

Further, in the first embodiment, two members (left variable performance member 14L, right variable performance member 14R) are provided as variable performance members, but the number of variable performance members may be one or three or more. It's okay. That is, the present invention is applicable to a gaming machine that includes at least one variable effect member that is movable within a predetermined range in front of the display screen.

Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a second embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment has a structure of a variable performance member provided near the center decoration body 10 and control related to the operation (driving) of the variable performance member (“variable performance”) as compared with the first embodiment described above. (also called "control") are the main differences. Below, points different from the first embodiment will be explained, and detailed explanations of points common to the contents explained in the first embodiment may be simplified or omitted. Further, for the configurations common to the first embodiment, the same symbols, number of control steps, etc. as in the first embodiment will be used.

[Configuration of variable performance components]
The variable effect member 200 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 50. As shown in the figure, there are three movable bodies 200a, A variable effect member 200 including 200b and 200c is provided.

The variable effect member 200 (movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c) can change between a non-operating state shown in FIG. 50(A) and an operating state shown in FIG. 50(B). This state change includes a stepping motor (drive means) that operates the variable performance member 200 (movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c), and gears, shafts, belts, etc. that transmit the driving force of the motor. This is realized by an operating mechanism (not shown). That is, the variable effect member 200 is configured to be operable between the non-operating state and the operating state. Note that the configuration of the operating mechanism of the variable effect member 200 itself is not related to the gist of the present invention, so a detailed explanation of the operating mechanism will be omitted.

When the variable effect member 200 is in a non-operating state (non-operating), the three movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c are all positioned on the outer periphery of the display screen 7a so as not to cover the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is hidden behind the center decorative body 10 (game board 2) and cannot be seen from the front. Specifically, the variable effect member 200 is located in a space formed between the game board 2 and an image display device 7 arranged behind it (on the back side), A movable body 200a is positioned above the image display device 7 (display screen 7a), a movable body 200b is positioned at the lower right of the image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and a movable body 200c is positioned (standby) at the lower left of the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). In FIG. 50(A), the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c (variable effect member 200 in an inactive state) in the standby position are indicated by broken lines.

The movable body 200a is also referred to as the "upper movable body" or the "first movable body", the movable body 200b is also referred to as the "lower right movable body" or the "second movable body", and the movable body 200c is also referred to as the "lower right movable body" or "second movable body". is also referred to as the "lower left movable body" or the "third movable body."

When the execution timing of a variable performance (gimmick performance) for activating the variable performance member 200 arrives under a situation where the variable performance member 200 is in a non-operating state, the three movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c move from the standby position to a predetermined position. Move towards the working position. In this embodiment, the three movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c each move simultaneously toward the center of the display screen 7a, and the movable bodies are positioned close to each other in front of the display screen 7a (operating position). ) is configured to stop at As shown in FIG. 50(B), the state in which the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c are stopped at their respective operating positions is the operating state of the variable effect member 200.

At least one of the three movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c constituting the variable performance member 200 is provided with a position detection sensor (not shown) at a standby position and an operating position, respectively, and the signal of the position detection sensor (detection signal ), the performance control microcomputer 91 can detect the state of the variable performance member 200 (position of the movable body).

When the variable effect member 200 is in the operating state (in operation), the three movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c are all located in front of the display screen 7a so as to cover the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , it becomes visible from the front. Specifically, when the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c each move from the standby position to the operating position, each movable body (variable effect member 200) moves in front of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 50(B). They are combined (integrated) to cover most (substantially the entire area) of the display screen 7a.

The movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c are each plate-shaped resin molded products, and the surface (front side) of each movable body has a motif (shape) when combined (integrated). , pattern, etc. (in this embodiment, a predetermined character). That is, the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c appear in front of the display screen 7a, move to the operating position, and become close to each other, thereby completing the motif (see FIG. 50). (See B).

In this embodiment, the variable performance using the variable performance member 200 (movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c) is performed as a preview performance during the variable display of the performance symbols 8 (during a variable game), or as part of the reach performance. It is possible to go there. Therefore, by executing the variable performance using the variable performance member 200, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's expectations for a jackpot.

Further, in this embodiment, the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c (variable effect member 200) are made of frosted glass-like colorless translucent resin (resin molding). Then, when the movable bodies are combined (integrated) in front of the display screen 7a and are in a state of covering the display screen 7a (that is, the variable performance member 200 is in the operating state), the variable performance member 200 (the movable body 200a , 200b, 200c) from the rear (back side) (also referred to as a "decoration effect image" or a "specific effect image") is displayed. In other words, a display effect corresponding to the variable effect is executed.

Although illustration of the decorative effect image is omitted, the decorative effect image is covered with at least the variable effect member 200 (movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c) that is combined (integrated) on the front side of the display screen 7a. (a position facing the back surface of the variable effect member 200). Note that a decorative effect image may be displayed on the entire display screen 7a, like the background of the display screen 7a.

In this embodiment, a plurality of decorative effect images having mutually different colors (display colors) are provided as the decorative effect images, and any one of them is displayed. The color of the motif (completed motif) formed on the surface of the variable presentation member 200 (movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c) is configured to change according to the color (display color) of this decorative presentation image. . Thereby, it is possible to enhance the visual performance effect (visual effect) when the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c are combined (integrated) (when the variable performance member 200 is in the operating state).

After the variable performance is executed during the variable performance and the variable performance member 200 enters the operating state (after the movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c move to the operating position), at a predetermined time before the variable performance ends, The variable performance member 200 returns to the non-operating state (the three movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c move all at once to the standby position). In other words, in this embodiment, after the variable performance member 200 changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, the execution mode of the variable performance executed during the variable performance (the operating state of the variable performance member 200) is changed to the operating state. It is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then returns to the non-operating state based on the arrival of a predetermined return timing.

The timing at which the variable effect member 200 changes from the non-operating state to the operating state (also referred to as "operation start timing" or "operating timing") and the timing (return timing) at which the variable effect member 200 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state (return timing) are as follows: An execution pattern of a variable performance (variable performance pattern) including the operation of the variable performance member 200 (variable performance), an execution pattern of a preview performance (notice performance pattern) including the operation of the variable performance member 200 (variable performance), a variable performance member It can be determined by 200 operation patterns (variable effect patterns), etc. Specifically, for example, the operation start timing of the variable performance member 200 is when the performance scene enters the climax (transferring to the climax performance) in the SP reach performance, and the operation is started for a predetermined period of time after the variable performance member 200 is in the operating state. The return timing of the variable performance member 200 can be set as the time when the best performance is started after a period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. In addition, the operation start timing of the variable performance member 200 is set at the time when entering a performance scene in which the result of winning or losing (properness judgment result) is known in the SP reach performance (when transitioning to the win/loss notification performance), and the variable performance member 200 is in the operating state. The timing at which the winning/losing notification effect is started after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed can be set as the return timing of the variable effect member 200.

In addition, in this embodiment, the three movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c are moved when the variable effect member 200 changes from the non-operating state to the operating state and when changing from the operating state to the non-operating state. Although it is assumed that the movable bodies operate (move) all at once (synchronously), each movable body may operate (move) at different timings (separately), such as in the order of movable body 200a → movable body 200b → movable body 200c. You can also do this.

[Sub relay board]
Next, the relay board 108 (see FIG. 5) of this embodiment to which the variable effect member 200 is connected will be described. In this embodiment, the relay board 108 is also referred to as a "sub relay board" (sub relay board 108).

In this embodiment, the variable effect member 200 (movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c) is connected to the sub-control board 90 via the lamp control board 107 and the sub-relay board 108. Note that it may be connected to the sub-control board 90 via the sub-relay board 108 without using the lamp control board 107. That is, the sub control board 90 and the sub relay board 108 may be directly connected.

The sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for performance control) includes a variable performance (variable performance pattern) in a variable performance pattern (S4505) and a preview performance pattern (S4506) that are set based on commands received from the main control board 80. In the case where the variable performance member 200 is operated based on the performance pattern, the variable performance member 200 is configured to perform a variable performance by operating the variable performance member 200 (movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c).

A stepping motor (also referred to as a "movable body motor"), not shown, is connected to the sub relay board 108 to operate the variable performance member 200 (movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c). Corresponding to this, as shown in FIG. 51, a movable body motor driver IC1 that controls the drive of the movable body motor is mounted on the sub relay board 108. In this embodiment, the movable body motor is also referred to as "drive means", and the movable body motor driver IC1 is also referred to as "drive control means".

In this embodiment, the three movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c are operated by one movable body motor, but one movable body may be operated by one movable body motor. That is, a first movable body motor that operates the movable body 200a, a second movable body motor that operates the movable body 200b, and a third movable body motor that operates the movable body 200c may be provided.

The movable motor of this embodiment has two independent coils (for example, an A-phase coil and a B-phase coil), and uses a drive method (bipolar drive) in which current flows bidirectionally to one coil. It is a bipolar stepping motor. In this embodiment, the excitation method of the movable motor is two-phase excitation.

As shown in FIG. 51, the movable motor driver IC1 has a Vcc terminal, a VREFA terminal, a VREFB terminal, a PHASEA terminal, a PHASEB terminal, an INA1 terminal, an INA2 terminal, an INB1 terminal, an INB2 terminal, a STANDBY terminal, and a 6-bit GND terminal. , 2 bits of OUTA+ terminal, 2 bits of OUTA- terminal, 2 bits of OUTB+ terminal, 2 bits of OUTB- terminal, 2 bits of RSA terminal, 2 bits of RSB terminal, 18 bits of NC (unconnected) terminal, and other terminals (OSCM terminal, VM terminal).

The Vcc terminal is a terminal to which 5V power is supplied. The VREFA terminal is an A-phase motor output setting terminal for the movable body motor, and the VREFB terminal is a B-phase motor output setting terminal for the movable body motor. The current output from the OUTA+ and OUTA- terminals is switched by the voltage applied to the VREFA terminal, and by increasing the voltage applied to the VREFA terminal, the current output from the OUTA+ and OUTA- terminals is increased. is possible. Similarly, the voltage applied to the VREFB terminal switches the current output from the OUTB+ and OUTB- terminals, and by increasing the voltage applied to the VREFB terminal, the current output from the OUTB+ and OUTB- terminals is changed. It is possible to make it larger.

The PHASEA terminal is an A-phase polarity setting terminal for the movable motor. The PHASEB terminal is a B-phase polarity setting terminal for the movable motor. The INA1 terminal and the INA2 terminal are A-phase output control terminals for the movable body motor. The INB1 terminal and the INB2 terminal are B-phase output control terminals for the movable body motor. The STANDBY terminal is a power saving mode setting terminal. The GND terminal is a terminal for connecting to ground.

The OUTA+ terminal is a current output terminal for the A-1 terminal (not shown) of the A-phase coil of the movable motor. The OUTA- terminal is a current output terminal for the A-2 terminal (not shown) of the A-phase coil of the movable motor. The OUTB+ terminal is a current output terminal for the B-1 terminal (not shown) of the B-phase coil of the movable motor. The OUTB- terminal is a current output terminal for the B-2 terminal (not shown) of the B-phase coil of the movable motor. The RSA terminal is a terminal for detecting the current output to the A-phase coil of the movable motor. The RSB terminal is a terminal for detecting the current output to the B-phase coil of the movable motor.

The movable body motor driver IC1 is a constant current that can supply a constant current to each terminal A-1, A-2 of the A-phase coil and each terminal B-1, B-2 of the B-phase coil of the movable body motor. The drive of the movable body motor is controlled using a current drive method. The constant current drive method constantly monitors the current flowing through each coil of the stepping motor to maintain a constant current, and when a current exceeding the specified current begins to flow, the voltage is repeatedly turned on and off at high speed to maintain a constant current. This is a method of maintaining In the movable body motor driver IC1 of this embodiment, the constant current supplied by the constant current drive method is set to 200 mA. Note that the current value shown in this embodiment is just an example, and can be changed as appropriate depending on the number, size, weight, moving speed, etc. of the variable effect members (movable bodies).

As shown in FIG. 51, the OUTA+ terminal of the movable body motor driver IC1 is connected to the No. 1 terminal of the connector CN via the control line L1. The No. 1 terminal of the connector CN is connected to the A-1 terminal (not shown) of the A-phase coil of the movable motor via a harness (not shown). Therefore, it is possible to flow the current output from the OUTA+ terminal of the movable body motor driver IC1 to the A-1 terminal of the A-phase coil of the movable body motor through the control line L1.

As shown in FIG. 51, the OUTA- terminal of the movable body motor driver IC1 is connected to the No. 2 terminal of the connector CN via the control line L2. The second terminal of the connector CN is connected to the A-2 terminal (not shown) of the A-phase coil of the movable motor via a harness (not shown). Therefore, it is possible to flow the current output from the OUTA- terminal of the movable body motor driver IC1 to the A-2 terminal of the A-phase coil of the movable body motor through the control line L2.

As shown in FIG. 51, the OUTB+ terminal of the movable body motor driver IC1 is connected to the No. 3 terminal of the connector CN via the control line L3. The third terminal of the connector CN is connected to the B-1 terminal (not shown) of the B-phase coil of the movable motor via a harness (not shown). Therefore, it is possible to flow the current output from the OUTB+ terminal of the movable body motor driver IC1 to the B-1 terminal of the B-phase coil of the movable body motor through the control line L3.

As shown in FIG. 51, the OUTB- terminal of the movable body motor driver IC1 is connected to the No. 4 terminal of the connector CN via the control line L4. The No. 4 terminal of the connector CN is connected to the B-2 terminal (not shown) of the B-phase coil of the movable body motor via a harness (not shown). Therefore, it is possible to flow the current output from the OUTB- terminal of the movable body motor driver IC1 to the B-2 terminal of the B-phase coil of the movable body motor through the control line L4.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 51, the control lines extending from the two OUTA+ terminals of the movable body motor driver IC1 are combined to form one control line L1. Similarly, the control lines extending from the two OUTA- terminals are combined into one control line L2, the control lines extending from the two OUTB+ terminals are combined into one control line L3, and the two control lines extending from the OUTB+ terminal are combined into one control line L3. The control lines extending from the OUTB- terminal are combined into one control line L4. This is because the current that can be output from one terminal (for one bit) of the movable body motor driver IC1 is limited, so by combining the control lines extending from two terminals, it is possible to supply a larger current. It's for a reason.

Furthermore, Zener diodes D1, D2, D3, D4 are provided between each control line L1, L2, L3, L4 and the ground, respectively, and a 24V power supply is provided between each control line L1, L2, L3, L4. Zener diodes D5, D6, D7, and D8 are provided between them, respectively. The movable motor of this embodiment is a bipolar stepping motor as described above, and since the direction of the current is switched in the A-phase coil and B-phase coil of each phase when the movable motor rotates, each control line L1 , L2, L3, and L4 also change the direction of the current. Therefore, Zener diodes are provided on both the ground side and the power supply side so that when an unintended excess current occurs, the excess current can be reliably released to either the ground side or the power supply side.

As shown in FIG. 51, a control line extending from the VREFA terminal of the movable body motor driver IC1 and a control line extending from the VREFB line are combined to form one control line L5. The control line L5 is divided into a control line L5a extending upward from the branch point BT and a control line L5b extending downward from the branch point BT. A resistor R1 is connected to the control line L5a, and a resistor R2 is connected to the control line L5b.

The movable body motor driver IC1 is configured to perform pulse width modulation (PWM) based on a chopping reference frequency and supply a constant current (200 mA in this embodiment). The chopping reference frequency means the speed at which the semiconductor element is switched between ON and OFF, and is appropriately set according to the resistor R3 and capacitor C1 shown in FIG. 51. Further, a capacitor C2 shown in FIG. 51 is a bypass capacitor (pass capacitor) connected between the power supply line and the ground, and stabilizes the control circuit in the movable body motor driver IC1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, an input/output IC 2 is mounted on the sub relay board 108. The input/output IC2 is for inputting and outputting digital signals. The input/output IC 2 is also referred to as "input/output means" or "control signal output means."

As shown in FIG. 51, the input/output IC2 has a serial data input/output terminal (SDA terminal), a serial clock input terminal (SCL terminal), a Vcc terminal, an address setting terminal for 3 bits (A0 to A2 terminal), and a 6-bit output terminals P00 to P05 and other terminals (GND terminal, INT terminal).

The input/output IC 2 is communicably connected to the production control microcomputer 91 by an I2C (Inter Integrated Circuit) communication method. That is, the SDA terminal of the input/output IC 2 is connected to the data signal line to which the serial port (not shown) of the production control microcomputer 91 is connected. Further, the SCL terminal of the input/output IC 2 is connected to the clock signal line to which the serial port (not shown) of the production control microcomputer 91 is connected.

When communicating with the input/output IC 2 using the I2C communication method, the production control microcomputer 91 first transmits address information of the input/output IC 2 as serial data. When a response signal is received from the input/output IC 2 to which an address matching the address information is assigned, drive data for driving the variable effect member 200 (movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c) is sent to the input/output IC 2. Send as serial data. The input/output IC 2 outputs control signals from output terminals P00 to P05 based on drive data input from the performance control microcomputer 91. Thereby, it is possible to drive the movable body motor so that the variable performance member 200 (movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c) operates in the operating mode based on the drive data.

The Vcc terminal of the input/output IC2 is a terminal to which 5V power is supplied. The A0 terminal of the input/output IC 2 is connected to ground, and the A1 and A2 terminals are connected to a 5V power supply. The 6-bit output terminals P00 to P05 are connected to the PHASEA terminal, PHASEB terminal, INA1 terminal, INA2 terminal, INB1 terminal, and INB2 terminal of the movable body motor driver IC1 via control lines, respectively.

The movable body motor driver IC1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to supply the above-mentioned constant current, and also configured to be able to supply a current smaller than the constant current (also referred to as "specific current"). Specifically, the movable body motor driver IC1 inputs an "H" level signal to the PHASEA terminal, inputs an "H" level signal to the PHASEB terminal, and inputs an "H" level signal to the INA1 terminal. , when inputting an "H" level signal to the INA2 terminal, "H" level signal to the INB1 terminal, and "H" level signal to the INB2 terminal, a predetermined constant current (this implementation In the example, it is configured to be able to supply 200 mA). That is, the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs the "H" level PHASEA control signal, the "H" level PHASEB control signal, and the "H" level INA1 control signal from the output terminals P00 to P05 of the input/output IC 2. When controlled to output the INA2 control signal at the "H" level, the INB1 control signal at the "H" level, and the INB2 control signal at the "H" level, a constant current as 100% current (in this example, 200mA).

On the other hand, the movable body motor driver IC1 inputs an "H" level signal to the PHASEA terminal, an "H" level signal to the PHASEB terminal, and an "L" level signal to the INA1 terminal. When inputting an "H" level signal to the INA2 terminal, "L" level signal to the INB1 terminal, and "H" level signal to the INB2 terminal, a constant current (200 mA in this example) is applied. It is configured to be able to supply a current (80 mA) that is said to be 40% larger. That is, the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs the "H" level PHASEA control signal, the "H" level PHASEB control signal, and the "L" level INA1 control signal from the output terminals P00 to P05 of the input/output IC 2. When controlled to output the INA2 control signal at the "H" level, the INB1 control signal at the "L" level, and the INB2 control signal at the "H" level, a current ( specific current).

Furthermore, the movable body motor driver IC1 of this embodiment supplies current to the movable body motor in a state where the drive (rotation) of the movable body motor is stopped, and generates stop excitation (holding torque) in the movable body motor. It is composed of Stopping the drive of the movable body motor and supplying current to the movable body motor (making the movable body motor energized), in other words, bringing the movable body motor into a stopped state and energized state is also called a "stopped energized state". say.

The movable body motor driver IC1 operates when operating the variable performance member 200, that is, moves the movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c from the standby position to the operating position, or moves the movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c from the operating position to the standby position. When moving the movable body motor, a constant current (driving current) is supplied to the movable body motor to drive the movable body motor. In other words, when the variable effect member 200 that is in an inactive state is actuated to become an actuated state, or when the variable effect member 200 that is in an actuated state is actuated to become an inactive state, the movable body motor is supplied with a constant current (drive electric current). A driving force based on this constant current is applied to the variable performance member 200 (movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c).

On the other hand, when the variable performance member 200 is activated, the three movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c are combined (integrated) at the activated position to complete one motif (character in this embodiment). Therefore (see FIG. 50(B)), when the variable effect member 200 is put into the operating state, reliability is required to maintain the operating state. Therefore, when the variable performance member 200 is at least in the operating state (the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c are at least in the operating position), the movable body motor driver IC1 supplies a constant current ( In this embodiment, the movable body motor is configured to be held (maintained) in a stopped state (stationary state) by supplying a current smaller than 200 mA (controlling it to a stopped energized state). In other words, the movable body motor driver IC1 is configured to be able to control the movable body motor to a stopped energized state by stopping the drive of the movable body motor and energizing the movable body motor while the variable effect member 200 is maintained in the operating state. has been done. As a result, a holding force (holding torque) that holds the variable effect member 200 in the operating state (the movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c are in the operating position) is generated with a small amount of current consumption, and the variable effect member 200 is held in the operating state (movable). This makes it possible to maintain the stopped state of the body motor.

Note that when the variable effect member 200 is in a non-operating state (the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c are in a standby position), no current is supplied to the stopped movable body motor (it is controlled to be in a non-energized state). Alternatively, as described above, a current smaller than the constant current may be supplied (controlled to a stopped energization state). Since a small holding torque is generated even in the non-energized state, it is possible to maintain the non-operating state of the variable effect member 200 (the stopped state of the movable body motor). In particular, when the variable effect member 200 is in the inactive state, the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c are in the standby position and cannot be seen from the front (see FIG. 50(A)), so the variable effect member 200 is in the active state. In some cases, the accuracy of stopping and holding the movable body motor may be lower than in other cases. By setting the movable body motor in a non-energized state when the variable effect member 200 is in an inactive state, it is possible to reduce current consumption. In addition, in order to increase the reliability of maintaining the non-operating state when the variable production member 200 is in the non-operation state, a constant current is applied to the stopped movable body motor when the variable production member 200 is in the non-operation state. A current smaller than that may be supplied (controlled to a stopped energized state).

Here, in addition to the motor (driving means) that operates the variable performance member 200, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with various electrical components such as decorative lights and a solenoid that operates the variable ball entry device. ing. The provision of various electrical components in this way is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, but is the same for other gaming machines installed in the gaming hall. Since many game machines are usually installed in a game hall, their power consumption tends to be large. For this reason, it is desirable to suppress the power consumption per gaming machine as much as possible.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, a current value reduction circuit 210 is provided between the movable body motor driver IC1 and the input/output IC2 of the sub relay board 108. The current value reduction circuit 210 causes the movable body motor driver IC 1 to generate a current (also referred to as "specific small current") that is smaller than a current (specific current) that is 60% smaller than a constant current (200 mA in this embodiment) to the movable body. This makes it possible to supply it to the motor. That is, the current value of the current supplied to the movable body motor is reduced to less than the current value of the specific current. The current value reduction circuit 108 is also referred to as "current value reduction means." The current value reduction circuit 210 will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 51, the current value reduction circuit 210 includes an NPN transistor TR1, a control line L6 connected to the collector of the transistor TR1, a control line L7 connected to the base of the transistor TR1, and a control line L7 connected to the base of the transistor TR1. The inverter element INV1 is connected to the line L7. A resistor R5 is connected to the control line L6. One end (upper end) of the control line L6 is connected to the control line L5, and the other end (lower end) of the control line L6 is connected to the ground.

The control line L7 is a control line branched from the control line L8 that connects the output terminal P02 of the input/output IC2 and the INA1 terminal of the movable body motor driver IC1. When a "L" level control signal is output as the INA1 control signal from the output terminal P02 of the input/output IC2, the control signal is converted to the "H" level by the inverter element INV1. On the other hand, when an "H" level control signal is output as the INA1 control signal from the output terminal P02 of the input/output IC2, the control signal is converted to the "L" level by the inverter element INV1. The control signal thus converted is input to the base of the transistor TR1.

Here, when a constant current (200 mA in this embodiment) is supplied from the movable body motor driver IC1, the production control microcomputer 91 receives the "H" level PHASEA control from the input/output IC2 as described above. PHASEB control signal at "H" level, INA1 control signal at "H" level, INA2 control signal at "H" level, INB1 control signal at "H" level, and INB2 control signal at "H" level. control to output the signal. At this time, on the control line L7, the "H" level INA1 control signal is converted to the "L" level by the inverter element INV2. Therefore, no voltage is applied between the base and emitter of the transistor TR1. As a result, no current flows from the collector to the emitter of the transistor TR1, and the resistor R5 connected to the control line L6 does not function.

Therefore, in this case, the magnitude of the voltage acting on the VREFA terminal and VREFB terminal of the movable body motor driver IC1 depends only on the resistance value of the resistor R1 and the resistance value of the resistor R2. As a result, the current output from the OUTA+ terminal, OUTA- terminal, OUTB+ terminal, and OUTB- terminal becomes a constant current (200 mA in this embodiment) due to the combined resistance value of the resistor R1 and the resistor R2. By supplying a constant current to the movable body motor in this manner, the movable body motor can operate the variable performance member 200 (movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c).

In contrast, a current (specific current) that is 60% smaller than the constant current (200 mA in this example), that is, a current that is 40% of the constant current, is supplied from the movable body motor driver IC1. In this case, as described above, the production control microcomputer 91 receives the "H" level PHASEA control signal, the "H" level PHASEB control signal, the "L" level INA1 control signal, and the "H" level INA1 control signal from the input/output IC 2. ” level INA2 control signal, “L” level INB1 control signal, and “H” level INB2 control signal are output. At this time, the INA1 control signal at the "L" level on the control line L7 is converted to the "H" level by the inverter element INV1. Therefore, a voltage is applied between the base and emitter of the transistor TR1. As a result, a current flows from the collector to the emitter of the transistor TR1, and the resistor R5 connected to the control line L6 becomes functional.

Therefore, in this case, the magnitude of the voltage acting on the VREFA terminal and VREFB terminal of the movable body motor driver IC1 depends not only on the resistance values of the resistor R1 and the resistor R2, but also on the resistance value of the resistor R5. do. As a result, due to the combined resistance value of resistor R1, resistor R2, and resistor R5, the current output from the OUTA+ terminal, OUTA- terminal, OUTB+ terminal, and OUTB- terminal is 40% of the constant current (80 mA ) is even smaller than Specifically, a current (40 mA) with a magnitude of 20% of the constant current (50% of the specific current) is supplied to the movable body motor.

In this embodiment, when the performance control microcomputer 91 controls the output of the control signal so that a current (specific current) of 40% of the constant current is supplied from the movable body motor driver IC1, the resistance R5 will now function automatically. This allows the movable body motor driver IC1 to supply the specific small current (40 mA), which is even smaller than the specific current (80 mA), to the movable body motor. This specific small current is supplied to the movable body motor that has stopped driving with the variable effect member 200 in the operating state, and by generating stop excitation based on the specific small current, the variable effect member 200 is maintained in the operating state. During this time, it becomes possible to apply a stopping force to the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c that are stopped at the operating position. As a result, current consumption can be further reduced compared to the case where stop excitation is generated based on a specific current (80 mA). Note that the magnitude of the current (specific small current) supplied to the movable body motor by the current value reduction circuit 210 functioning may be even smaller than the current value shown in this embodiment, causing stop excitation. (Maintaining the variable effect member 200 in the operating state) can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in this embodiment, in the current value reduction circuit 210, by inputting the INA1 control signal output from the input/output IC 2 through the control line L7 branched from the control line L8, the movable body motor driver IC1 is configured to supply. In this way, by using the INA1 control signal output from the input/output IC 2 as it is, there is no need to newly increase the number of control signals output from the input/output IC 2. In other words, as shown in FIG. 51, a specific small current can be supplied from the movable body motor driver IC1 by simply providing the current value reduction circuit 210 between the movable body motor driver IC1 and the input/output IC2. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to easily realize a configuration (current value reduction means) capable of supplying a specific small current using a hardware configuration.

In this embodiment, the configuration (current value reduction means) capable of supplying a specific small current is realized by the current value reduction circuit 210 (hardware configuration), but without providing the current value reduction circuit 210, for example, As described above, the number of control signals output from the input/output IC 2 may be increased to realize a configuration (current value reduction means) capable of supplying a specific small current in software. With this, a specific small current (40 mA), which is even smaller than the specific current (80 mA), is supplied to the movable motor that is not driving to generate stop excitation, that is, to operate the variable effect member 200 with less current consumption. It is possible to maintain (retain) the state.

[Variable production control]
Next, variable performance control executed by the performance control microcomputer 91 (performance control means) will be explained. In this embodiment, the variable performance control executed by the performance control microcomputer 91 mainly includes a variable performance member initial activation process (S5000) shown in FIG. 52 and a variable performance process (S5100) shown in FIG. 53. ing. Below, these two processes will be explained in order.

[Variable performance member initial operation processing]
The variable performance member initial activation process (S5000) is executed only once after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on (when the power is turned on), similar to the processes of S4001 to S4003 of the sub-control main process described above (see FIG. 37). This is a process that That is, this is a process executed based on reception of a power-on command from the main control board 80.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the variable effect member initial activation process (S5000), first, initial drive data is output to the movable body motor driver IC1 (see FIG. 51) of the sub relay board 108 (S5001). The initial drive data is data (serial data) for supplying a constant current (200 mA in this embodiment) to the movable body motor to operate the variable effect member 200 in a predetermined initial operating mode.

In this embodiment, the initial operation mode of the variable performance member 200 is different from the operation mode of the variable performance member 200 when the variable performance is executed during the variable performance (during execution of the variable game). Specifically, the three movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c move from the standby position to the operating position and perform a series of reciprocating movements twice, then move to the operating position again and stop at the operating position. The plan is to do so. The operation of the variable effect member 200 according to the initial operation mode is also referred to as "initial operation." This initial operation (initial operation mode) is performed after the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on and before the game machine becomes ready for playing (while the variable game is not being executed). This can be said to be a confirmation of the operation of the variable effect member 200 upon power-on.

Note that the initial operating mode of the variable effect member 200 is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the number of reciprocating movements of the variable effect member 200 may be set to one time or three times, or the operating speed of the variable effect member 200 ( The movement speed) can be changed as appropriate, such as by making it slower than the variable performance during the variable performance. Further, the operation mode may be the same as the operating mode of the variable presentation member 200 during the variable presentation.

The initial drive data output in S5001 is input to the input/output IC2 (see FIG. 51) of the sub relay board 108, and the input/output IC2 receives a constant current ( In this embodiment, the above-mentioned control signal for supplying 200 mA to the movable body motor is outputted from the output terminals P00 to P05. Thereby, it is possible to supply a constant current to the movable body motor and operate the variable performance member 200 (movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c) in the initial operating mode.

Next, in S5002, it is determined whether the initial operation of the variable effect member 200 has been completed (S5002). Here, it is determined whether the movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c have stopped at the operating position. This determination can be made based on a detection signal from a position detection sensor (also referred to as an "operation position sensor") that detects that the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c are in the operation position. Specifically, the movable body It can be determined that 200a, 200b, and 200c have stopped at the operating position (the initial operation of the variable effect member 200 has ended).

If it is determined that the initial operation of the variable performance member 200 has been completed (YES in S5002), the process moves to S5003, and if it is determined that the initial operation of the variable performance member 200 has not been completed (NO in S5002), the variable The determination in S5002 is repeated until the initial operation of the presentation member 200 is completed.

Next, in S5003, operating state maintenance data is output to the movable body motor driver IC1 (see FIG. 51) of the sub relay board 108 (S5001). The operating state maintenance data is generated by supplying a specific small current (a current that is 20% of the constant current) to the movable motor that has stopped driving to generate stop excitation, and to maintain the variable effect member 200 that is in the operating state in the operating state. This is data (serial data) to be retained (maintained).

As mentioned above, the production control microcomputer 91 sends a control signal via the input/output IC 2 so that the specific current (80 mA) that is 60% smaller than the constant current (200 mA in this embodiment) is supplied from the movable body motor driver IC 1. When outputted, the current value reduction circuit 210 (see FIG. 51) functions, and a specific small current (40 mA) whose current value is even smaller than the specific current is supplied to the movable body motor. In other words, the operating state maintenance data includes control signals for specific current supply (PHASEA control signal at "H" level, PHASEB control signal at "H" level, INA1 control signal at "L" level, INA2 control signal at "H" level). This is data for causing the input/output IC 2 to output the INB1 control signal, the INB1 control signal at the "L" level, and the INB2 control signal at the "H" level.

The operating state maintenance data output in S5003 is input to the input/output IC2 (see FIG. 51) of the sub relay board 108, and the input/output IC2 is specified from the movable body motor driver IC1 based on the operating state maintenance data. The aforementioned control signals for supplying current are output from output terminals P00 to P05. As a result, a specific small current (40 mA) smaller than the specific current (80 mA) is supplied to the stopped movable body motor, and it is possible to maintain the variable effect member 200 in the operating state with a small consumption current. Note that the variable effect member 200 that is in the operating state due to the initial operation is maintained in the operating state until a return condition described below is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to easily attract players' interest even when they are not playing a game.

[Variable effect processing]
The variable performance process (S5100) is a process that is executed during the aforementioned 10ms timer interrupt process (S4010) after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on (after startup).

As shown in FIG. 53, in the variable effect processing (S5100), first, it is determined whether the operating position sensor is ON (S5101). As mentioned above, the initial operation of the variable performance member 200 ends with the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c stopped at the operating positions, so the game cannot be started even after the initial operation of the variable performance member 200 is completed. If not, the operating position sensor remains ON. In S5101, it is thus determined that the operating position sensor remains ON, that is, that the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c are stopped at the operating position.

If it is determined in S5101 that the operating position sensor is not ON (OFF) (NO in S5101), the process moves to S5104, which will be described later. It is determined that the operating position sensor is not ON (OFF), for example, when the movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c are not in the operating position and the variable effect member 200 is in the non-operating state.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the operating position sensor is ON (YES in S5101), it is determined whether a return condition for returning the variable effect member 200 to the non-operating state is satisfied (S5102). In this embodiment, the return condition (also referred to as "operation state release condition" or "operation termination condition") is detection of contact with the firing handle 60.

As described above, when the firing handle 60 is operated, the touch switch 114 (see FIG. 5) is configured to detect the touch of the firing handle 60 by the operator (player). . In this embodiment, the detection signal of the touch switch 114 is also input to the sub-control board 90, and the performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to control the variable performance member 200 when the game is not being played and the variable performance member 200 is in the operating state. Under certain circumstances, when the detection signal of the touch switch 114 switches from OFF to ON, it is determined that the return condition is satisfied (YES in S5102). In other words, after the CPU initialization process (initial settings) etc. that accompany the power-on of the pachinko game machine 1 are completed and the pachinko game machine 1 is in the operating state (playable state), the player can play the game with the pachinko game machine 1. The variable effect member 200 is configured to return to the non-operating state upon starting the process.

Note that the return condition is not limited to detection of contact with the firing handle 60; for example, the starting port sensor (see FIG. 5) detects the entry of a game ball into the starting port, or identification information (special design or production). Various conditions that can be considered as the start of the game, such as the start of the variable display of symbols), can be changed as appropriate. Further, a non-contact type sensor capable of detecting the presence of a player may be provided on the front side of the game board or the game machine frame, and the return condition may be that the sensor is turned on.

If it is determined in S5102 that the return condition is not satisfied (NO in S5102), the process ends without performing the processes from S5103 onwards. In this case, since it is considered that the game has not yet started after the initial operation of the variable performance member 200 has ended, this process is ended without performing the processes after S5103.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the return condition is satisfied (YES in S5102), drive data (also referred to as "return drive data") for returning the variable effect member 200 to the non-operating state is transmitted to the sub control board 90. (S5103). The return drive data set in the drive data output buffer is output to the sub-relay board 108 through the drive data output process described above (S4203, see FIG. 39).

The return drive data is data (serial data) that supplies a constant current (200 mA in this example) to the movable body motor and drives the movable body motor so as to move the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c from the operating position to the standby position. data).

The return drive data set in S5103 is input to the input/output IC2 (see FIG. 51) of the sub-relay board 108, and the input/output IC2 receives a constant current (main current) from the movable body motor driver IC1 based on the return drive data. In the embodiment, the above-mentioned control signal for supplying a current of 200 mA to the movable body motor is outputted from the output terminals P00 to P05. Thereby, it is possible to supply a constant current to the movable body motor and return the variable effect member 200 to the non-operating state (move the movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c to the standby position). When the variable effect member 200 returns to the non-operating state, the operating position sensor is turned off, and a position detection sensor (also referred to as a "standby position sensor") detects that the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c are in the standby position. becomes ON.

Next, in S5104, it is determined whether the variable performance execution condition is satisfied (S5104). In this embodiment, when a variable performance pattern including a variable performance is set in S4505 described above, or a preview performance pattern including a variable performance is set in S4506 described above, the performance pattern is executed in response to the setting of the performance pattern. During the variable performance (during execution of the variable game), a variable performance (gimmick performance) that operates the variable performance member 200 is executed.

Here, a variable performance pattern including a variable performance or a preview performance pattern including a variable performance is also referred to as a "game performance pattern with gimmick" or a "special performance pattern", and a variable performance pattern that does not include a variable performance or a notice performance pattern including a variable performance is also referred to as a "game performance pattern with gimmick" or a "special performance pattern". A preview performance pattern without a gimmick is also referred to as a ``gimmick-free game performance pattern,'' a ``non-special performance pattern,'' or a ``normal performance pattern.''

In S5104, if the game performance pattern with gimmick is set in S4505 or S4506 described above, it is determined that the variable performance execution condition is satisfied (YES in S5104), and the game performance with gimmick is determined to be satisfied in both S4505 and S4506 described above. When a pattern is not set (when a gimmick-free game performance pattern is set), it is determined that the variable performance execution condition is not satisfied (NO at S5104).

If it is determined in S5104 that the variable performance execution condition is not satisfied (NO in S5104), the process moves to S5106 described later, and if it is determined that the variable performance execution condition is satisfied (YES in S5104), the variable performance member Drive data (also referred to as "variable performance drive data") for executing a variable performance that operates 200 is set in the drive data output buffer (S5105). The set variable performance drive data is output to the sub-relay board 108 by the aforementioned drive data output process (S4203) in accordance with the operation start timing and return timing of the variable performance member 200 determined in the gimmick game performance pattern. be done. Specifically, drive data for moving the movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c from the standby position to the operating position is output in accordance with the operation start timing of the variable effect member 200, and the return timing of the variable effect member 200 (for example, the variable Drive data for moving the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c from the operating position to the standby position is output at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the effect member 200 was activated.

The variable performance drive data supplies a constant current (200 mA in this example) to the movable body motor, moves the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c from the standby position to the operating position, and stops at the operating position for a predetermined period of time. This is data (serial data) for driving the movable body motor to move the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c from the operating position to the standby position.

The variable effect drive data set in S5105 is input to the input/output IC2 (see FIG. 51) of the sub relay board 108, and the input/output IC2 receives a constant current from the movable body motor driver IC1 based on the variable effect drive data. The aforementioned control signal for supplying power (200 mA in this embodiment) to the movable body motor is output from output terminals P00 to P05. As a result, a constant current is supplied to the movable body motor to change the variable effect member 200 from the inactive state to the active state (move the movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c from the standby position to the active position), 200 can be changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (moving the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c from an operating position to a standby position).

The variable effect member 200 remains in the actuated state (movable) until a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the variable effect member 200 entered the actuated state, that is, until the return timing of the variable effect member 200 arrived. The bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c are maintained at the operating position (see FIG. 50(B)), and during this time, the drive of the movable body motor is stopped. At this time, a current smaller than the constant current is supplied to the movable motor (stop energization state), and stop excitation (stop holding force) is generated.

Note that while the variable effect member 200 is in the operating state (until the return timing arrives), similar to the above-mentioned operating state maintenance data (S5003), a specific small current (constant Data (serial data) for generating stop excitation by supplying a current (20% of the current) is set in the drive data output buffer, and output to the sub relay board 108 (input to the input/output IC 2). It's okay. In this way, it is possible to reduce the current consumption (power consumption) while the variable performance member 200 is in the operating state (until the return timing arrives) during the execution period of the variable performance.

Here, as described above, when the variable performance member 200 is brought into operation by executing the variable performance (the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c move to the operation position), the display screen 7a accordingly displays a A decorative effect image (specific effect image) is displayed that decorates the variable effect member 200 (movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c) located on the front side of the screen 7a from the rear (back side). The decorative performance image is displayed based on a game performance pattern with a gimmick (variable performance pattern or preview performance pattern), and is displayed while the variable performance member 200 is in the operating state (until the return timing arrives). , is displayed behind the variable performance member 200 (at least at a position facing the back surface of the variable performance member 200).

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, a plurality of decorative performance images with different display colors are provided, and when executing a variable performance based on a game performance pattern with gimmick, any one of the plurality of decorative performance images is Is displayed. Examples of the plurality of decoration images include a first decoration image whose display color is blue, a second decoration image whose display color is green, and a third decoration image whose display color is red. and a fourth decorative effect image whose display color is a rainbow color. Then, a jackpot expectation level is predetermined for each display color (that is, a decorative effect image), and the variable effect pattern set in the above-mentioned S4505 and the judgment result of the special symbol that triggers the setting of the variable effect pattern, etc. It can be configured such that one of the decorative effects images is displayed depending on the situation. In this example, the expectation level of jackpot increases in the order of first decorative effect image (blue) → second decorative effect image (green) → third decorative effect image (red) → fourth decorative effect image (rainbow color) Therefore, the fourth decorative effect image (rainbow color) is intended to suggest that the jackpot is confirmed. By displaying such a decorative effect image, the color of the motif (see FIG. 50(B)) that is completed when the variable effect member 200 is activated (the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c are combined) is displayed. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to what will happen. This makes it possible to increase the interest when the variable performance is executed.

When the variable performance member 200 operates in the initial operating mode (initial operation) and enters an operating state (when variable play is not being performed) through the aforementioned variable performance member initial operation process (S5000), the decorative performance image is not displayed. The initial operation of the variable performance member 200 is a confirmation of the operation of the variable performance member 200 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and there is little need to display the decorative performance image (indicating the likelihood of a jackpot) when play is not being performed. By not displaying the decorative performance image, it is possible to make the variable performance member 200 look simple. It is also possible to reduce the processing burden on the image display device, even if only slightly, and therefore power consumption can be reduced.

Next, in S5106, it is determined whether a condition (also referred to as "standby condition") for placing the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a standby state (waiting for a customer) is satisfied (S5106). Here, in the above-mentioned Example 1, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed while the number of reserved special drawing balls is "0" and the variable game is not executed, a standby screen is displayed on the display screen 7a. , the pachinko game machine 1 was put into a standby state. In this embodiment, the standby condition is that a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses in such a state that the number of reserved balls of special figures is "0" and the variable game is not executed. That is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed in a state where the number of reserved special drawing balls is "0" and the variable game is not executed (while the variable game is not being executed), it is determined that the standby condition is satisfied (YES in S5106).

If it is determined in S5106 that the standby condition is not satisfied (NO in S5106), this process ends without performing the process in S5107, and if it is determined that the standby condition is satisfied (YES in S5106), the standby drive data and Set the operating state maintenance data to the drive data output buffer (S5107). The standby drive data and operating state maintenance data set in the drive data output buffer are sequentially output to the sub-relay board 108 through the drive data output process (S4203) described above.

The standby drive data supplies the movable body motor with a constant current (200 mA in this example) to move the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c from the standby position to the operating position and stop them at the operating position. This is data (serial data) that drives the motor. In addition, as mentioned above, the operating state maintenance data is obtained by supplying a specific small current (20% of the constant current) to the movable motor that has stopped driving to generate stop excitation. This is data (serial data) for holding (maintaining) the member 200 in the operating state.

The standby drive data set in S5107 is input to the input/output IC2 (see FIG. 51) of the sub-relay board 108, and the input/output IC2 receives a constant current (main current) from the movable body motor driver IC1 based on the standby drive data. In the embodiment, the above-mentioned control signal for supplying a current of 200 mA to the movable body motor is outputted from the output terminals P00 to P05. Thereby, it is possible to supply a constant current to the movable body motor and change the variable performance member 200 from a non-operating state to an active state (moving the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c from a standby position to an active position). . The variable performance member 200 that has become activated in this way, that is, the variable performance member 200 that has become activated based on the establishment of the standby condition, is maintained in the activation state until the above-mentioned return condition is satisfied (YES in S5102). Ru.

When the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c move to the operating position and stop at the operating position by driving the movable body motor based on the standby drive data (the variable effect member 200 becomes the operating state), S5107 The operating state maintenance data set in is outputted to the sub-relay board 108. The output of this operating state maintenance data can be executed, for example, when the operating position sensor is turned on.

The operating state maintenance data set in S5107 is input to the input/output IC2 (see FIG. 51) of the sub-relay board 108, and the input/output IC2 receives a specific current from the movable body motor driver IC1 based on the operating state maintenance data. The above-mentioned control signal for supplying the power is outputted from the output terminals P00 to P05. Then, the current value reduction circuit 210 functions, and a specific small current (40 mA) smaller than the specific current (80 mA) is supplied to the stopped movable body motor. As a result, even when the variable effect member 200 enters the operating state based on the establishment of the standby condition (occurrence of the standby state), it becomes possible to maintain the variable effect member 200 in the operating state with a small amount of current consumption. As a result, power consumption during standby can be reduced.

It should be noted that when the variable effect member 200 enters the operating state based on the establishment of the standby condition (occurrence of the standby state), the above-mentioned decorative effect image is not displayed on the display screen 7a. This is because there is little need to display a decorative effect image (suggesting the level of expectation of a jackpot) in the standby state. This is also because the variable effect member 200 can be made to look simple in the standby state.

In this embodiment, when the variable performance member 200 is activated based on the establishment of a standby condition (occurrence of a standby state), the standby screen (demo screen) is not displayed on the display screen 7a. When the variable performance member 200 is in an activated state, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered by the variable performance member 200 (see FIG. 50(B)), and even if a demo screen is displayed in this state, it is difficult to see the display content from the front.

However, the decorative effect image or the demonstration screen may be displayed when the variable effect member 200 is activated based on the establishment of the standby condition (occurrence of the standby state). In this embodiment, the variable effect member 200 is made of colorless and translucent resin with a frosted glass appearance, and the contents of the decorative effect image and the demo screen (display color, etc.) can be recognized to some extent through the variable effect member 200. It is.

In addition, the moving speed (rotational speed of the movable body motor) when moving the movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c from the standby position to the operating position based on the establishment of the standby condition (occurrence of the standby state) is determined by the variable effect drive data. The speed may be controlled to be slower than the moving speed (rotational speed of the movable body motor) when moving the movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c from the standby position to the operating position. The operation of the variable performance member 200 based on the standby drive data is performed as part of a demonstration performance (standby performance) in response to the establishment of a standby condition (occurrence of a standby state), and is not performed as a gimmick performance during a game. It is from.

Here, in the variable performance processing (S5100), the variable performance member 200 that is in the non-operating state is activated and brought into operation based on the establishment of the variable performance execution condition (YES in S5104) during the variable performance (during the variable game). After that, before the end of the variable performance, the control to activate the variable performance member 200 in the operating state and bring it into the non-operation state (operation control of the variable performance member 200 based on the variable performance drive data) It is also called ``1 variable performance control''.

In addition, in the variable performance member initial activation process (S5000), after the variable performance member 200 that is in the inactive state is activated (initial activation) in the initial operation mode to be in the active state, the return condition is set in the variable performance process (S5100). Until the variable performance member 200 is established (YES in S5102), the variable performance member 200 is maintained in the operating state, and the variable performance member 200 is in the inactive state based on the establishment of the standby condition (YES in S5106) in the variable performance processing (S5100). The control for maintaining the variable effect member 200 in the active state after activating the variable effect member 200 until the return condition is satisfied (YES in S5102) is also referred to as "second variable effect control."

[Effects of Example 2]
According to the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, during the execution of the variable game, the operation control of the variable performance member 200 when the variable performance is executed during the variable performance ("first variable performance control") According to one aspect), after the variable presentation member 200 in the non-operating state is activated and becomes the activated state, the variable presentation member 200 is activated and returns to the non-activated state before the end of the variable game. The performance (gimmick performance) by the performance member 200 becomes executable. In addition to this, while a variable game is not being executed, the operation control of the variable performance member (the After the variable performance member 200 that is in the inactive state is activated and becomes the active state by the variable performance control (one aspect of "2 variable performance control"), the variable performance member 200 is operated until the return condition (an aspect of the "predetermined condition") is satisfied. It becomes possible to perform a performance (gimmick performance) by the variable performance member 200 such that the variable performance member 200 maintains the operating state. For this reason, the variable performance member 200 operates not only during the variable game but also when the variable game is not in progress and is in the operating state. remains in the operating state until the Thereby, the performance effect of the variable performance member 200 can be obtained not only during the variable game but also when the variable game is not in progress, and it is possible to enhance the interest when the variable game is not in progress. In particular, it is possible to easily attract players' interest in the pachinko game machine 1 where no games are being played, thereby improving the operation of the game machine.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the variable performance member 200 is in the operating state, the variable performance member 200 (movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c) is located in front of the display screen 7a, so that the display At least a part of the screen 7a is now covered by the variable effect member 200. Then, when the variable performance member 200 enters the operating state due to the execution of the variable performance (that is, during the execution of the variable game), a decorative performance image (an aspect of the "specific performance image") is displayed on the display screen 7a. , a synergistic effect can be achieved by the variable effect member 200 that is activated and the decorative effect image displayed on the display screen 7a. On the other hand, while the variable effect member 200 is maintained in the operating state due to the initial operation or the occurrence of a standby state upon power-on of the pachinko game machine 1 (that is, while the variable game is not being executed), a decorative effect image is displayed on the display screen 7a. is not displayed, it is possible to make the variable effect member 200 maintained in the operating state appear simple. This makes it possible to perform performances suitable for both the execution and non-execution of the variable game.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment, the movable body motor driver IC1 (an aspect of the "drive control means") that can control the drive of the movable body motor (one aspect of the "drive means") that operates the variable performance member 200 (one aspect) is configured to be able to supply a current (one aspect of the "specific current") that is 60% smaller than a predetermined constant current (one aspect of the "driving current") to the movable body motor. In addition, while the variable performance member 200 is maintained in the operating state due to the initial operation or the occurrence of a standby state when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, the drive of the movable body motor is stopped and the movable body motor is energized. It is configured to be able to be controlled to a stopped energized state. Under such a configuration, in the stopped energization state, the current value of the current supplied to the movable body motor is reduced by 60% of the constant current by the current value reduction circuit 210 (an aspect of "current value reduction means"). The current value is reduced to an even smaller current value (less than the current value of the specific current) than the small current (specific current). Therefore, while the variable performance member 200 is maintained in the operating state (while the variable game is not being executed) due to the initial operation or standby state that occurs when the power is turned on of the pachinko game machine 1, the movable member 200 is in the stopped energized state. The current supplied to the motor is even smaller than the current (specific current) which is 60% smaller than the constant current that can be supplied by the movable body motor driver IC1. Thereby, it becomes possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance by the variable performance member 200 and to reduce the current consumed while the variable game is not being executed as much as possible.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment, the current value of the current supplied to the movable body motor in the stopped and energized state is reduced by half of the current value of the specific current (80 mA in this embodiment) by the current value reduction circuit 210. The current is reduced to below (40 mA in this example). For this reason, the current supplied to the movable body motor is reduced while the variable performance member 200 is maintained in the operating state (while the variable game is not being executed) due to the initial operation or standby state that occurs when the power is turned on of the pachinko game machine 1. It becomes possible to further reduce the current value. This makes it possible to further reduce the current consumed while the variable game is not being executed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a variable effect member (variable effect member 200) that can be changed between a non-operating state and an active state is used. In the operating state, the three movable bodies 200a, 200b, and 200c are in the operating position and can be seen from the front, and are combined (integrated) in the operating position to cover most of the display screen 7a. (See FIG. 50). However, the configuration of the variable effect member is not limited to this, and for example, a structure like the variable effect member 14 of Example 1 ( (see FIGS. 45, 47, etc.). Moreover, the number of movable bodies that constitute the variable effect member does not need to be three, and may be one or two, or may be four or more.

Further, in the second embodiment, the variable effect member is provided near the center decoration body 10 (on the game board side), but the position where the variable effect member is provided is not limited to this example. For example, It may be provided at a predetermined position (frame side) other than the game board, such as the upper part (above the window part) or the right part (to the right side of the window part) of the front frame 51, or the top surface of the upper tray 61. Furthermore, even if a plurality of variable effect members are provided, for example, two or more types of variable effect members are provided on the game board side, variable effect members are provided on both the game board side and the frame side, etc. good. In a configuration in which a plurality of variable effect members are provided in this manner, when a motor (driving means) is provided for each of the plurality of variable effect members, a current value reduction circuit (current value reduction means) is provided for each motor. Alternatively, depending on the configuration, specifications, etc. of the variable effect member, a case where a current value reduction circuit (current value reduction means) is provided and a case where it is not provided may coexist.

For example, in the case where the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment is provided with another variable effect member (for example, a frame gimmick provided on the front frame) in addition to the variable effect member 200, the other variable effect member is not activated. The current (specific small current) supplied to the motor via the current value reduction circuit cannot sufficiently obtain the stop excitation (stop holding force) of the motor for maintenance (holding). ), the current value reduction circuit (current value reduction means) may not be provided if the current value can be obtained with a smaller current (specific current) than . This also makes it possible to reduce the current consumption as much as possible when maintaining the variable performance member in the operating state while the variable game is not being executed.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the variable performance member 200 changes from the non-operating state to the active state due to execution of the variable performance during the variable performance (during the variable game), the variable performance member 200 (movable bodies 200a, 200b, 200c) A decorative effect image that decorates from the rear (back side) is displayed, and the color of the motif (completed motif) applied to the surface of the variable effect member 200 is determined by the color (display color) of the decorative effect image. However, the form of the decorative effect image (specific effect image) is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate depending on the configuration of the variable effect member. For example, a frame-shaped variable effect member (also referred to as a "frame-shaped movable body") with a picture frame or frame as a motif and a hollowed out interior is provided, and when the variable effect is executed, the frame-shaped movable body moves to the front side of the display screen. When it appears, a predetermined image corresponding to the hollowed out part of the frame-shaped movable body that appears on the near side of the display screen (hollowed part corresponding image) may be displayed as a decorative effect image. This also makes it possible to enhance the visual effect when variable effects are executed.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Example 3 will be explained. This embodiment is characterized by a configuration in which various signals (also referred to as "external signals") are output to external devices such as a hall computer and a data display provided in a game hall. The configuration related to signal output of this embodiment can also be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-mentioned embodiments 1 and 2. Hereinafter, the configuration related to signal output of this embodiment will be explained using an example in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is provided. In addition, the points that are different from the first embodiment will be explained below, and the detailed explanation of the points that are common to the contents explained in the first embodiment may be simplified or omitted. Further, for the configurations common to the first embodiment, the same symbols, number of control steps, etc. as in the first embodiment are used.

[Configuration of firing handle]
The configuration of the firing handle 60 included in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54. The configuration of the firing handle 60 will be explained because, in this embodiment, as described later, it is used as one of the signals (external signals) to be output to an external device during the game (during a symbol variation game or a special This is because a signal (also referred to as a "shooting stop signal") is provided to indicate that the shooting of game balls has been stopped during games (games, etc.).

FIG. 54 is a front view of the firing handle 60, showing the appearance of the firing handle 60 when viewed from the front. 54(A) shows a state in which the firing handle 60 is not operated (non-operated state), and FIG. 54(B) shows a state in which the firing handle 60 is operated (operated state). Note that the configuration of the firing handle 60 can be a known one, for example, the configuration disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-131555.

As shown in FIG. 54(A), when the firing handle 60 is not operated, the rotation operation portion 60a is maintained in the initial state (initial position, origin position). At this time, the firing stop operation section 60b provided in the firing handle 60 is kept in a state (ON position) that turns on the firing stop switch 115t (see FIG. 55) provided inside the firing handle 60. .

A switching member (not shown) is provided inside the firing handle 60 to turn on/off the firing stop switch 115t, and the firing stop operation section 60b can switch the firing stop switch 115t on/off by operating the switching member. It is provided as a means to The firing stop switch 115t is also referred to as a "firing stop means," the firing stop operation section 60b is also referred to as a "firing stop operation means," and the rotating operation section 60a is also referred to as a "firing operation means." Further, the firing stop switch 115t and the firing stop operation section 60b are also collectively referred to as "fire stopping means".

When the firing stop switch 115t is on, that is, when the detection signal of the firing stop switch 115t (also referred to as a "firing stop detection signal") is on, a signal that drives the firing motor 113 (also referred to as a "firing drive signal"). ) is turned off (OFF), and the drive of the firing motor 113 is stopped. Further, the drive of the ball feeding device (not shown) that supplies the game balls (launched balls) stored in the upper tray 61 to the shooting device 112 is also stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball is stopped.

When the rotation operating portion 60a is rotated clockwise from the non-operating state of the firing handle 60 as shown in FIG. 54(B), the firing handle 60 is brought into the operating state. At this time, the firing stop operation section 60b is kept in a state where the firing stop switch 115t is turned off (off position). Furthermore, since the touch switch 114 provided on the firing handle 60 detects the operator's (player's) contact with the rotating operation section 60a, the touch switch 114 is turned on. In other words, the detection signal (also referred to as a "touch signal") of the touch switch 114 is turned on.

When the touch switch 114 (touch signal) is on, the firing stop switch 115t (firing stop detection signal) is off, and the firing volume 115 detects the amount of operation of the rotation operation section 60a, a signal is sent to drive the firing motor 113. (emission drive signal) is turned on, the ball feeding device is driven, and the ejection motor 113 is driven in accordance with the detection signal of the ejection volume 115 (the amount of operation of the rotation operation section 60a). As a result, the game ball is ejected with a ejection intensity that corresponds to the amount of operation of the rotation operation section 60a.

As shown in FIG. 54(B), the off position of the firing stop operation part 60b is set in the direction away from the central axis (rotation axis of the rotational operation part 60a) extending in the front-rear direction of the firing handle 60 (in the paper plane of the figure). left direction). In this state, that is, in the state in which the rotation operation part 60a is rotated (operation state) (that is, while firing the game ball), press the firing stop operation part 60b toward the center axis of the firing handle 60. When set to the on position (see FIG. 54(A)), the firing stop switch 115t is turned on, and driving of the ball feeding device and the firing motor 113 is stopped. In other words, regardless of the state of the detection signal (touch signal) of the touch switch 114 or the detection signal of the firing volume 115, when the firing stop switch 115t (firing stop detection signal) is turned on, the firing drive signal is turned off, and the ball feeding device And the driving of the firing motor 113 is stopped. Then, when the rotation operation section 60a is rotated (operation state), when the pressing operation on the firing stop operation section 60b in the on position is released, the firing stop operation section 60b returns to the off position (Fig. 54(B) ), the firing stop switch 115t (firing stop detection signal) is turned off, and the driving of the ball feeding device and firing motor 113 is restarted.

[Electrical configuration]
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, and replaces FIG. 5.

As shown in FIG. 55, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment includes an external terminal board 130 for outputting external signals to an external device 500 such as a hall computer or a data display. The external terminal board 130 includes an input side connector and an output side connector (not shown), and the input side is connected to the payout control board 130, and the output side is connected to the external device 500. Note that the external terminal board 130 is provided at a predetermined position (for example, the upper part of the back surface) on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, taking into consideration the workability of connecting the cable (signal line) with the external device 500 (see FIG. 2). .

In this embodiment, in addition to the ball detection sensor, the sensors connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88 include a radio wave sensor 71 that can detect radio waves output from a radio wave output device, and a radio wave sensor 71 that can detect radio waves output from a magnet. The magnetic sensor 72 is equipped with a magnetic sensor 72 capable of detecting magnetic field.

The radio wave sensor 71 detects a radio wave when a radio wave is output from a radio wave output device on the front side of the game board 2. This radio wave sensor 71 is mainly provided to detect fraudulent acts (so-called "radio wave fraud") that cause the ball detection sensor to falsely detect radio waves (illegal radio waves). One or more sensors are provided depending on the number and position of the mouths (ball detection sensors), the radio wave detection range (detection performance), and the like. Specifically, for example, the radio wave sensor 71 is targeted at the first starting port 20 (first starting port sensor 20a) and the second starting port 21 (second starting port sensor 21a), which are the trigger for executing the special symbol validity determination. can be provided.

The detection signal of the radio wave sensor 71 (also referred to as a "radio wave detection signal" or "radio wave sensor signal") input to the main control board 80 is, for example, when the radio wave sensor 71 is not detecting a radio wave (illegal radio wave). When the radio wave sensor 71 detects a radio wave (illegal radio wave), it is turned off.

The magnetic sensor 72 detects the magnetism of a magnet when the magnet is brought close to the surface of the window (visual window) of the front frame 51 . This magnetic sensor 72 is mainly used to detect fraudulent acts (so-called "magnet goto") in which a magnet is used to forcibly guide game balls to a starting hole, a general winning hole, a specific area (V area), etc. One or more balls may be provided depending on the number and position of ball entry ports (ball detection sensors) that are the target of magnet gore countermeasures, the magnetic detection range (detection performance), and the like. Specifically, for example, the magnetic sensor 72 can be provided for the first starting opening 20 which is the trigger for executing the special symbol validity determination and the general winning opening 27 which is the trigger for putting out prize balls.

The detection signal of the magnetic sensor 72 (also referred to as a "magnetic detection signal" or "magnetic sensor signal") that is input to the main control board 80 is, for example, when the magnetic sensor 72 is not detecting magnetism (normal time). It is turned off, and turned on when the magnetic sensor 72 detects magnetism.

The radio wave sensor 71 and magnetic sensor 72 that can detect fraudulent acts such as radio waves and magnetic waves (an aspect of the "first event") are also referred to as "fraud detection sensors" or "fraud detection means." Note that it is also possible to provide a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibrations applied to the gaming machine as the fraud detection sensor (fraud detection means). The vibration sensor mainly detects the vicinity of a specific area (V area) that is an opportunity to award a gaming benefit, or a lottery area (for example, a starting gate) that is an opportunity to execute a lottery related to a gaming benefit. To detect fraudulent activity (so-called ``hitting'') in which game balls are directed toward those areas by hitting the game machine and applying vibrations (shocks) to the game board (playing area) as the game balls flow down. It is provided in Examples of gaming benefits include moving to a relatively advantageous gaming state such as a special gaming state or a variable probability gaming state.

Here, a fraud detection sensor capable of detecting a fraudulent act (an aspect of the "first event") or a game ball that is paid out as a prize ball, that is, detects the payout of a prize ball (an aspect of the "first event") Possible dispensing sensors 122, 123 (see FIG. 55) are also referred to as "first detection means."

A frame open detection switch 70 that can detect that the front frame 51 is open is connected to the payout control board 70. The frame open detection switch 70 is provided, for example, on the front frame 51 or the main body frame 52, and is used when the front frame 51 changes from a closed state (closed state) to an open state (open state) or from an open state to a closed state. It is configured such that when the state changes, the on/off state is switched according to the state change.

For example, the detection signal of the frame open detection switch 70 input to the payout control board 70 (also referred to as a "frame open detection signal") is turned off when the front frame 51 is in the closed state, and when the front frame 51 is in the open state. Turns on when the That is, when the frame open detection switch 70 detects the opening of the front frame 51 (change of the front frame 51 from the closed state to the open state), the detection signal of the frame open detection switch 70 is turned on. Further, when the frame open detection switch 70 detects the closing of the front frame 51 (change of the front frame 51 from the open state to the closed state), the detection signal of the frame open detection switch 70 is turned off. The frame open detection switch 70 that can detect such a change in the state of the front frame 51 (an aspect of the "second event") is also referred to as a "state detection means", and the state detection means (frame open detection switch 70) This is also referred to as a "second detection means."

Here, the front frame 51 is operated by a clerk of the game hall (operation from the outside) when performing maintenance work on the game board 2 or work to eliminate ball jams (so-called "grapes") in the game area 3, for example. ) is opened and closed. The front frame 51, which can be changed between a closed state (first state) and an open state (second state) by an external operation, is also referred to as a "variable member."

Furthermore, the firing device 112 is connected to the payout control board 70 via the firing control board 111, as described in the first embodiment. The firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIGS. 1 and 54), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, a firing volume 115, and the aforementioned firing stop switch 115t. Detection signals from the touch switch 114, the firing volume 115, and the firing stop switch 115t are input to the firing control board 111. Further, the detection signal (firing stop detection signal) of the firing stop switch 115t is input to the payout control board 110 via the firing control board 111 (another board). Note that the firing stop detection signal input to the payout control board 110 may be input without going through the firing control board 111.

The detection signal (firing stop detection signal) of the firing stop switch 115t input to the payout control board 70 is turned off when the firing stop operation section 60b is in the off position (see FIG. 54(B)), and the firing is stopped. When the stop operation section 60b reaches the on position (see FIG. 54(A)), it is turned on. This on/off switching (signal change) also applies to the firing stop detection signal input to the firing control board 111.

As described above, when the firing handle 60 is in the non-operating state, the firing stop operation section 60b is in the ON position (see FIG. 54(A)), and when the firing handle 60 is in the operating state, the firing stop operation section 60b is in the ON position. is in the off position (see FIG. 54(B)). Further, when the firing handle 60 is in the operating state, that is, when the game ball is being fired, if the firing stop operation section 60b is pressed, the firing stop operation section 60b becomes the on position, and when the pressing operation is released, The firing stop operation section 60b is in the off position. In other words, the firing stop operation section 60b can be changed between the OFF position and the ON position by external operation. The firing stop switch 115t is configured to be turned on and off in accordance with the state change when the firing stop operation section 60b changes from the off position to the on position, or from the on position to the off position. be done. Therefore, the firing stop switch 115t also functions as a switch that detects a change in the state of the firing stop operation section 60b. The firing stop switch 115t, which can detect a change in the state of the firing stop operation part 60b (an aspect of the "second event"), also has a "state detecting means" or a "second event", similar to the frame opening detection switch 70 described above. 2 detection means. Further, the firing stop operation part 60b, which can be changed between the off position (first state) and the on position (second state) by external operation, can also be said to be a "variable member" like the above-mentioned front frame 51. .

Here, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the above-mentioned special figure 1 validity determination process (S1207), special figure 2 validity determination process (S1201), special electric accessory process (S1107), game state setting process (S2124), , the processing related to the payout of prize balls executed by the payout control microcomputer 116 based on the signal (prize ball payout command) from the game control microcomputer 81 is given to the player as a result of the game (game This is a control process related to gaming benefits and profits (obtained by players). The game control microcomputer 81 and the payout control microcomputer 116 that execute the control processing both function as a control unit that can execute control processing that affects the result of the game. The main control board 80 in which the game control microcomputer 81 (control unit) is provided and the payout control board 110 in which the payout control microcomputer 116 (control unit) is provided are also collectively referred to as "main board".

[External signal]
Next, external signals (external information) that can be output from the pachinko game machine 1 (external terminal board 130) to the external device 500 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 55, the external terminal board 130 is connected to the payout control board 110, and sends an external signal to the external device 500 based on the signal output from the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116). It is configured so that it can be output to. Further, the external terminal board 130 is connected to the main control board 80 via the payout control board 110, and transmits external signals to the external device 500 based on signals output from the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). It is configured to be able to output to.

The external terminal board 130 is provided with a plurality of channels for external output, and the connector (terminal) corresponding to each channel and the connector (terminal) on the external device 500 side are connected by a cable (not shown). ing. One signal is output from each connector (channel) to the external device 500.

The external terminal board 130 receives external signals such as a jackpot signal, a high probability state signal, a time saving state signal (high base state signal), a firing stop signal, a frame opening signal, as shown in FIGS. 56(A) to 56(G). It is possible to output prize ball information signals, security signals, etc. Note that the timing charts in FIGS. 56A to 56G conceptually show the state (signal level) of each external signal, and the time widths shown do not correspond to the actual time widths.

The jackpot signal is a signal indicating that a jackpot game is being executed. For example, it is off (L level) when a jackpot game is not being executed, and is on (H level) when a jackpot game is being executed (Fig. 56 (See (A)). Specifically, a gaming state (also referred to as a "symbol variation game state") in which a special symbol variable display (symbol variation game) such as a low probability low base state, a low probability high base state, and a high probability high base state can be executed. ), when the special symbol jackpot symbol (specific display result) is confirmed and the gaming state shifts from the symbol fluctuation gaming state to the jackpot gaming state (special gaming state), the gaming control microcomputer 81 controls the main control board 80. A jackpot game flag (not shown) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM is turned on, and accordingly, a jackpot game signal (not shown) output from the main control board 80 is turned on (H level). do. When this jackpot game signal (ON) is input to the external terminal board 130 via the payout control board 110, the jackpot signal output from the external terminal board 130 to the external device 500 is turned ON. That is, when the gaming state becomes a jackpot gaming state (special gaming state), the jackpot gaming signal changes from off (L level) to on (H level) by the control processing of the gaming control microcomputer 81, and based on the control processing. When the jackpot game signal (ON) is output from the main control board 80 and input to the external terminal board 130, a jackpot signal based on the input jackpot game signal (ON) is sent from the external terminal board 130 to the external device 500. is output (on output).

When the jackpot game ends, the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot game flag, and accordingly turns off (L level) the jackpot game signal output from the main control board 80. When this jackpot game signal (off) is input to the external terminal board 130 via the payout control board 110, the jackpot signal output from the external terminal board 130 to the external device 500 is turned off. That is, when the jackpot game (special game) ends and the game state changes to the symbol fluctuation game state, the jackpot game signal changes from on (H level) to off (L level) by the control process of the game control microcomputer 81. When the jackpot game signal (off) based on the control process is output from the main control board 80 and input to the external terminal board 130, the jackpot signal based on the input jackpot game signal (off) is output to the external terminal. The signal is output from the board 130 to the external device 500 (off output).

Based on the jackpot signal, for example, the external device 500 can count the number of jackpot game executions (number of jackpot occurrences) of the pachinko game machine 1 or manage (monitor) the operating status. becomes.

The high probability state signal is a signal indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variable state). For example, it is off (L level) during a non-high probability state (low probability state), turns on (H level) (see FIG. 56(B)). Specifically, when the gaming state shifts from the jackpot gaming state (special gaming state) to the symbol variation gaming state, if the symbol variation gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation gaming state), the gaming control microcomputer 81 , the probability change flag is turned on (S2202) by the above-mentioned game state setting process (S2124), and in conjunction with this, the probability change signal (not shown) output from the main control board 80 is turned on (H level). When this probability change signal (on) is input to the external terminal board 130 via the payout control board 110, the high probability state signal output from the external terminal board 130 to the external device 500 is turned on. That is, when the gaming state becomes a high probability state, the probability change signal changes from off (L level) to on (H level) by the control process of the game control microcomputer 81, and the probability change signal (on) is changed from off (L level) to on (H level) based on the control process. When is output from the main control board 80 and input to the external terminal board 130, a high probability state signal based on the input probability changing signal (ON) is output (ON output) to the external device 500.

When the high probability state ends, the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the probability change flag, and accordingly turns off (L level) the probability change signal output from the main control board 80. When this probability change signal (off) is input to the external terminal board 130 via the payout control board 110, the high probability state signal output from the external terminal board 130 to the external device 500 is turned off. That is, when the high probability state ends and the gaming state becomes a low probability state, the probability change signal changes from on (H level) to off (L level) by the control process of the game control microcomputer 81, and the control process When the probability change signal (off) based on the input probability change signal (off) is output from the main control board 80 and input to the external terminal board 130, a high probability state signal based on the input probability change signal (off) is output to the external device 500 (off). output).

Based on the high probability state signal, for example, it becomes possible on the external device 500 side to count the number of occurrences of the high probability state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or to manage (monitor) the operating status.

The time saving state signal is a signal indicating that the gaming state is in a time saving state (high base state). For example, it is off (L level) during a non-time saving state (low base state), state) is turned on (H level) (see FIG. 56(C)). Specifically, when the gaming state shifts from the jackpot gaming state (special gaming state) to the symbol variation gaming state, if the symbol variation gaming state is the time saving state (high base state), the gaming control microcomputer 81: The time saving flag is turned on (S2204) by the above-mentioned game state setting process (S2124), and in conjunction with this, the time saving signal (not shown) output from the main control board 80 is turned on (H level). When this time saving signal (ON) is input to the external terminal board 130 via the payout control board 110, the time saving state signal output from the external terminal board 130 to the external device 500 is turned ON. That is, when the gaming state becomes a high base state, the time saving medium signal changes from off (L level) to on (H level) by the control process of the game control microcomputer 81, and the time saving medium signal (on) based on the control process. When is output from the main control board 80 and input to the external terminal board 130, a time saving state signal based on the input time saving medium signal (ON) is output to the external device 500 (ON output).

When the time saving state ends, the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the time saving flag, and accordingly turns off the time saving signal output from the main control board 80 (L level). When this time saving signal (off) is input to the external terminal board 130 via the payout control board 110, the time saving state signal output from the external terminal board 130 to the external device 500 is turned off. That is, when the time saving state ends and the gaming state becomes a non-time saving state, the time saving signal changes from on (H level) to off (L level) by the control process of the game control microcomputer 81, and based on the control process. When the time saving signal (off) is output from the main control board 80 and input to the external terminal board 130, a time saving state signal based on the input time saving signal (off) is output to the external device 500 (off output). be done.

Based on the time-saving state signal, for example, it becomes possible on the external device 500 side to count the number of occurrences of the time-saving state of the pachinko game machine 1 or to manage (monitor) the operating status.

The firing stop signal is a signal indicating that the firing of the game ball has been stopped. For example, when the firing of the game ball is not stopped (while the game ball is being fired), it is turned off (L level) and the firing of the game ball is stopped. When the firing of the game ball is stopped (while the firing of game balls is stopped), it is turned on (H level) (see FIG. 56(D)). As described above, when the firing stop operation section 60b provided on the firing handle 60 is placed in the on position (see FIG. 54(A)), the firing stop switch 115t is turned on, and the firing stop operation input to the payout control board 110 is turned on. The detection signal turns on. The firing stop detection signal is input as is to the external terminal board 130 via the dispensing control board 110, and is output from the external terminal board 130 to the external device 500 as a firing stop signal. That is, the payout control board 110 functions as a relay board between the firing stop switch 115t and the external terminal board 130.

Here, the output of the firing stop signal to the external device 500 will be explained with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 shows the circuit configuration of the payout control board 110 and the external terminal board 130 to which the detection signal (firing stop detection signal) of the firing stop switch 115t is input. As shown in the figure, on the payout control board 110, a photocoupler 301 is mounted on the firing stop switch 115t side, a DMOS transistor array 303 is mounted on the external terminal board 130 side, and the photocoupler 301 and the DMOS transistor array 303 are mounted on the side of the external terminal board 130. A CMOS digital integrated circuit 302 is mounted between them.

In the photocoupler 301, when the ON signal of the firing stop detection signal is input from the firing stop switch 115t (that is, when the firing stop detection signal is turned on), the diode lights up. As a result, the phototransistor is illuminated, and a current (photocurrent) flows between the collector and base of the phototransistor, making it conductive. In the CMOS digital integrated circuit 302, when current flows to the input terminal A1, the current flows from the output terminal Y1 to the DMOS transistor array 303. In the DMOS transistor array 303, when current flows to the input terminal I4, the current flows from the output terminal O4 to the external terminal board 130.

A photo MOS relay 304 is mounted on the external terminal board 130. In the photoMOS relay 304, when the current from the DMOS transistor array 303 flows, the diode lights up. As a result, the photovoltaic cell charges the gate capacitance of the FET (field effect transistor), and the FET becomes conductive. As a result, a firing stop signal is output from the external terminal board 130 to the external device 500. In this way, even if the payout control board 110 inputs the shot stop detection signal (ON) from the shot stop switch 115t, the detection signal is unrelated to the payout control process by the payout control microcomputer 116. In other words, even if the firing stop detection signal (ON) based on the firing stop switch 115t is input to the dispensing control board 110, it is not controlled by the dispensing control microcomputer 116 and is sent to the external terminal board via the dispensing control board 110. 130. Then, a firing stop signal (ON) based on the firing stop detection signal (ON) input to the external terminal board 130 is output from the external terminal board 130 to the external device 500.

Based on the firing stop signal, for example, it becomes possible on the external device 500 side to count the number of times the pachinko game machine 1 stops firing game balls or to manage (monitor) the game ball firing status.

The frame open signal is a signal indicating that the front frame 51 is open. For example, when the front frame 51 is not open (closed), it is off (L level), and when the front frame 51 is open, the frame open signal is a signal indicating that the front frame 51 is open. When it is open (open), it is on (H level) (see FIG. 56(E)). As described above, when the front frame 51 is opened (changed from the closed state to the open state), the frame open detection switch 70 is turned on, and the frame open detection signal input to the payout control board 110 is turned on. The frame open detection signal is input as is to the external terminal board 130 via the payout control board 110, and is output to the external device 500 as a frame open signal. That is, the payout control board 110 functions as a relay board between the frame open detection switch 70 and the external terminal board 130.

Here, FIG. 58 shows the circuit configuration of the payout control board 110 and the external terminal board 130 to which the detection signal (frame open detection signal) of the frame open detection switch 70 is input. The circuit configuration is similar to the circuit configuration of the payout control board 110 and the external terminal board 130 (see FIG. 57) to which the detection signal (firing stop detection signal) based on the firing stop switch 115t described above is input. That is, as shown in FIG. 58, on the payout control board 110, a photocoupler 401 is mounted on the frame open detection switch 70 side, a DMOS transistor array 403 is mounted on the external terminal board 130 side, and the photocoupler 401 and the DMOS transistor A CMOS digital integrated circuit 402 is mounted between the array 403 and the array 403 . Further, a photo MOS relay 404 is mounted on the external terminal board 130. Since the output of the frame opening signal based on such a circuit configuration is the same as the output of the firing stop signal described above, a detailed explanation of the output of the frame opening signal will be omitted.

Based on the frame opening signal, for example, the external device 500 side counts the number of times the front frame 51 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is opened (opened and closed) or manages (monitors) the state of the front frame 51. becomes possible.

The prize ball information signal is a signal indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and is turned off (L level) every time a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out. to on (H level) (see FIG. 56(F)). Specifically, when the payout sensors 122, 123 (see FIG. 55) detect a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball, the detection signal (also referred to as a "prize ball detection signal") is input to the payout control board 110. Ru. The payout control microcomputer 116 outputs a prize ball payout signal ( (not shown) is turned on (H level). When this prize ball payout signal (ON) is input to the external terminal board 130, the prize ball information signal output from the external terminal board 130 to the external device 500 is turned ON. That is, the prize ball detection signals based on the payout sensors 122 and 123 are input to the payout control board 110 and are controlled and processed by the payout control microcomputer 116, and the prize ball payout signal (ON) based on the control process is input to the payout control board 110. When the prize ball information signal is output from the external terminal board 130, a prize ball information signal based on the input prize ball payout signal (ON) is output to the external device 500 (ON output). The control process related to the output of the prize ball payout signal by the payout control microcomputer 116 will be described later.

Based on the prize ball information signal, it becomes possible, for example, to count the number of prize balls paid out of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or to manage (monitor) the operating status on the external device 500 side.

The security signal is a signal indicating that fraud has been detected by the radio wave sensor 70 or the magnetic sensor 71 (see FIG. 55). For example, when no fraud has been detected, it is off (L level), indicating that fraud has not been detected. When this is done, it turns on (H level) (see FIG. 56(G)). Specifically, when the radio wave sensor 70 detects a radio wave or the magnetic sensor 71 detects magnetism, a radio wave detection signal or a magnetic detection signal is input to the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 turns on (H level) a fraud detection signal (not shown) output from the main control board 80 based on the input of the radio wave detection signal or the magnetic detection signal. When this fraud detection signal (ON) is input to the external terminal board 130 via the payout control board 110, the security signal output from the external terminal board 130 to the external device 500 is turned ON. That is, the detection signal based on the radio wave sensor 70 or the magnetic sensor 71 is input to the main control board 80 and controlled by the game control microcomputer 81, and the fraud detection signal (ON) based on the control processing is sent from the main control board 80. When the signal is output and input to the external terminal board 130, a security signal based on the input fraud detection signal (ON) is output (ON output) to the external device 500. The control process related to the output of the fraud detection signal by the game control microcomputer 81 will be described later.

Based on the security signal, it becomes possible, for example, on the external device 500 side to count the number of times the pachinko game machine 1 detects fraudulent activity (number of fraudulent detections) or monitor fraud.

Note that the on state of the fraud detection signal and the security signal can be canceled (off) by, for example, turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1 (power off) or turning the power on again (power off → power on). ). For example, turning on the power again may be accompanied by other operations such as operating a RAM clear switch.

In addition to the above-mentioned signals, the external terminal board 130 also receives, for example, a starting port signal indicating that a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (starting ball), A symbol confirmation signal indicating that the special symbol that had been fluctuatingly displayed has stopped display (confirmed display), a game ball enters the grand prize opening 30 when the grand prize device 31 is not operating, or when the variable winning device 22 is not operating It may be possible to output a second security signal or the like indicating that a game ball has entered the second starting port 21, and the type of external signal output from the external terminal board 130 can be changed as appropriate.

The above-mentioned jackpot game signal, probability change signal, time saving signal, prize ball payout signal, fraud detection signal, etc. are transmitted externally from the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) and payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116). The signals output to the terminal board 130 are each separate signals (parallel data), and are input to the external terminal board 130 as parallel data. When parallel data is input to the external terminal board 130, a signal transmission element such as a photorelay provided corresponding to each channel switches between a conductive state and a non-conductive state according to each input signal. As a result, an external signal is output from the channel whose photorelay has become conductive.

Here, the signal output from the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) or the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116) to the external terminal board 130 is also referred to as an "outer end output signal." The outer end output signal may be serial data having a plurality of bits of information. In this case, the serial data is converted into parallel data by an S/P conversion circuit (serial/parallel conversion circuit), not shown, and is input to the external terminal board 130 as parallel data.

[Prize ball payout monitoring process]
The prize ball payout monitoring process (S5000) executed by the payout control microcomputer 116 as a control process related to the output of the prize ball payout signal will be described with reference to FIG. 59. The prize ball payout monitoring process (S5000) executes a prize ball payout command sent from the game control microcomputer 81 (main control board 80) based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entrance, which is the trigger for paying out a prize ball. This is a process that is received by the payout control microcomputer 116 (payout control board 110) and executed when the payout device 120 pays out prize balls based on the prize ball payout command. This prize ball payout monitoring process (S5000) can be executed, for example, in an unillustrated interrupt process (timer interrupt process) executed by the payout control microcomputer 116 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms cycle).

As shown in FIG. 59, in the prize ball payout monitoring process (S5000), first, whether or not the detection signals (prize ball detection signals) of the payout sensors 122, 123 are turned on (that is, the payout sensors 122, 123 (S5001). As a result, if it is determined that the prize ball detection signal is not turned on (NO in S5001), this process is completed without performing the processes after S5003, and if it is determined that the prize ball detection signal is turned on (YES in S5001), the prize ball detection signal is determined to be on (YES in S5001). Add "1" to the value (count value) of the ball payout counter (S5003). The prize ball payout counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM of the payout control board 110, and counts the number of game balls paid out as prize balls.

Next, in S5005, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball payout counter is "10" (S5005). As a result, if it is determined that it is not "10" (NO in S5005), this process is completed without performing the processing after S5007, and if it is determined that it is "10" (YES in S5005), the payout control board 110 The prize ball payout signal as the outer end output signal outputted to the external terminal board 130 is turned on (S5007), the prize ball payout counter is cleared (zero cleared) (S5009), and this process is finished.

As a result, each time the value of the prize ball payout counter reaches "10", that is, each time 10 prize balls are paid out, a prize ball payout signal is output (ON output) from the payout control board 110 and the external terminal board 130 is input. Then, based on the prize ball payout signal (ON) input to the external terminal board 130, a prize ball information signal is output (ON output) from the external terminal board 130 to the external device 500.

[Illegal monitoring process]
The fraud monitoring process (S6000) executed by the gaming control microcomputer 81 as a control process related to the output of the fraud detection signal will be described with reference to FIG. 60. The fraud monitoring process (S6000) can be executed, for example, in the interrupt process (S105) that the game control microcomputer 81 executes at a predetermined cycle (eg, 4 ms cycle).

As shown in FIG. 60, in the fraud monitoring process (S6000), first, it is determined whether the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 70 or the magnetic sensor 71 is turned on (S6001). As a result, if it is determined that the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 70 or the magnetic sensor 71 is not turned on (NO in S6001), the process ends without performing the processes from S6003 onwards.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 70 or magnetic sensor 71 is turned on (YES in S6001), the fraud detection flag is turned on (S6003), and the signal is output from the main control board 80 to the external terminal board 130. The fraud detection output signal as the external output signal is turned on (S6005), and this processing is completed.

As a result, when the radio wave sensor 70 or the magnetic sensor 71 detects an unauthorized radio wave or magnetism, a fraud detection signal is outputted (on-outputted) from the main control board 80 and inputted to the external terminal board 130. Then, based on the fraud detection signal (ON) input to the external terminal board 130, a security signal is output (ON output) from the external terminal board 130 to the external device 500.

The fraud detection flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 80, and indicates that a fraudulent act (in this embodiment, radio waves or magnets) has been detected in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It's a flag. By providing the fraud detection flag, for example, it becomes possible to control execution of error notification based on the fraud detection flag. Specifically, based on the fact that the fraud detection flag is turned on, it is possible to perform error notification using a predetermined notification means such as the panel lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, the image display device 7, etc. . In this case, the error notification execution period may be, for example, while the fraud detection flag is on (on period), or until a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed after the fraud detection flag was turned on. You can

In addition, when the fraud detection flag is turned on, clearing (initialization) of the fraud detection flag can be done, for example, by turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1 (power off) or turning the power back on (power off → power on). It can be configured to be performed by For example, turning on the power again may be accompanied by other operations such as operating a RAM clear switch.

[Effects of Example 3]
According to the pachinko game machine 1 of the third embodiment described above, the control processing is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (one embodiment of a "control unit") provided on the main control board 80 (one embodiment of a "main board"). Outer end output signals (jackpot game signal, probability change signal, time saving signal, fraud detection signal) based on the payout control microcomputer 116 (" Detects the outer end output signal (prize ball payout signal) based on the control process by the control unit (one aspect of the “control unit”) and the change of the firing stop operation unit 60b from the off position to the on position (one aspect of the “predetermined event”) A frame capable of detecting a firing stop detection signal based on a possible firing stop switch 115t (an aspect of "detection means") and a change in the front frame 51 from a closed state to an open state (an aspect of a "predetermined event") A frame open detection signal based on the open detection switch 70 (an aspect of "detection means") can be input to the external terminal board 130, and an external signal (jackpot signal, high probability state signal, time saving state signal, security signal, prize ball information signal, firing stop signal, frame opening signal) can be output to the external device 500.

Under such a configuration, the outer end output signal (prize ball payout signal) based on the control process by the payout control microcomputer 116 of the payout control board 110 is output from the payout control board 110 and input to the external terminal board 130. Ru. In addition, the outer end output signals (jackpot game signal, probability change signal, time saving signal, fraud detection signal) based on the control processing by the game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80 are output from the main control board 80 and paid out. It is input to the external terminal board 130 via the control board 110. Further, a firing stop detection signal based on detection by the firing stop switch 115t and a frame open detection signal based on detection by the frame open detection switch 70 are input to the external terminal board 130 via the payout control board 110.

Therefore, a signal that triggers the output of an external signal to the external device 500, that is, a signal input to the external terminal board 130, always passes through the payout control board 110 (main board). Therefore, regardless of the source of the signal that triggers the output of an external signal to the external device 500, various external signals can be output to the external device 500 by connecting the payout control board 110 (main board) and the external terminal board 130. becomes possible. As a result, for example, an external signal (fire stop signal) caused by a change in the fire stop operation section 60b from the OFF position to the ON position (detected by the fire stop switch 115t) is sent to the external device 500 as a signal different from the existing signal. This makes it possible to easily cope with the case where an output configuration is adopted.

By making it possible to output the firing stop signal to the external device 500, for example, if the firing stop signal is frequently output (turned on), the firing of game balls that impairs fair play (for example, a single shot) can be prevented. It becomes possible for the game hall side to grasp that there is a possibility that a game (such as hitting, irregular hitting, etc.) is occurring. In this case, it is possible to promote fair gaming by monitoring players who make such firings and warning them as necessary.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the fraud detection sensors 71 and 72 (of the "first detection means") capable of detecting fraud such as radio wave goto and magnet goto (an aspect of the "first event") A signal based on the detection according to one embodiment) is input to the main control board 80 (main board) and is controlled by the gaming control microcomputer 81 (control unit) (fraud monitoring processing), and a fraud detection signal based on the control processing is generated. is output from the main control board 80 (main board) and input to the external terminal board 130. In addition, the signals based on the detection by the payout sensors 122, 123 (one form of the "first detection means") capable of detecting the payout of prize balls (one form of the "first event") are sent to the payout control board 110 (main board ) and is controlled by the payout control microcomputer 116 (control unit) (prize ball payout monitoring process), and a prize ball payout signal based on the control process is output from the payout control board 110 (main board) and sent to the outside. It is input to the terminal board 130.

On the other hand, firing based on detection by the firing stop switch 115t (an aspect of the "second detection means") capable of detecting a change in the firing stop operation part 60b from the OFF position to the ON position (an aspect of the "second event"). The stop detection signal is input to the payout control board 110 (main board) and is not controlled and processed by the payout control microcomputer 116 (control unit), but is sent to the external terminal board 130 via the payout control board 110 (main board). (See Figure 57). Additionally, the frame is opened based on detection by a frame open detection switch 70 (an aspect of the "second detection means") that can detect a change of the front frame 51 from the closed state to the open state (an aspect of the "second event"). The detection signal is input to the payout control board 110 (main board) and is input to the external terminal board 130 via the payout control board 110 (main board) without being controlled and processed by the payout control microcomputer 116 (control unit). (See Figure 58).

Therefore, due to a change from the off position to the on position of the firing stop operation section 60b (pressing operation of the firing stop operation section 60b) or a change from the closed state to the open state of the front frame 51 (opening of the front frame 51), External signals (firing stop signal, frame opening signal) can be output to the external device 500 without affecting the control processing of the payout control microcomputer 116 (control unit) of the payout control board 110 (main board). It becomes possible. As a result, external signals (security signal, prize ball information signal) caused by fraudulent activity or payout of prize balls (first event), pressing operation of the firing stop operation part 60b or opening of the front frame 51 (second event) It becomes possible to output external signals (firing stop signal, frame opening signal) caused by this to the external device 500 while suppressing an increase in the control processing burden on the payout control board 110 (main board).

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, signals based on the detection by the fraud detection sensors 71 and 72 are input to the main control board 80 (main board) and are controlled and processed by the game control microcomputer 81 (control unit). (fraud monitoring process), and a fraud detection signal based on the control process is output from the main control board 80 (main board) and input to the external terminal board 130 via the payout control board 110 (main board). A security signal (external signal) based on the detected fraud detection signal is output to the external device 500. That is, a fraud detection signal is output from the main board and input to the external terminal board 130, and a security signal (external signal) based on the input fraud detection signal is output to the external device 500. Thereby, a configuration in which an external signal caused by fraudulent activity is output to the external device 500 can be easily realized by connecting the payout control board 110 (main board) and the external terminal board 130.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the third embodiment, the firing stop operation portion 60b (an aspect of the “variable member”) changes from the off position (an aspect of the “first state”) to the on position (an aspect of the “second state”). A firing stop detection signal based on the detection by the firing stop switch 115t (one type of "state detection means") capable of detecting a change to the state (one aspect) is inputted to the dispensing control board 110 (main board) and sent to the dispensing control microcontroller. 116 (control unit), is input to the external terminal board 130 via the dispensing control board 110 (main board), and a firing stop signal (external signal) based on the input signal is sent to the external device 500. (See Figure 57). In addition, frame open detection can detect a change of the front frame 51 (an aspect of the “variable member”) from a closed state (an aspect of the “first state”) to an open state (an aspect of the “second state”). The frame opening detection signal based on the detection by the switch 70 (an aspect of the "state detection means") is input to the payout control board 110 (main board) and is not controlled and processed by the payout control microcomputer 116 (control unit). , is input to the external terminal board 130 via the payout control board 110 (main board), and a frame opening signal (external signal) based on the input signal is output to the external device 500 (see FIG. 58). ). As a result, the configuration in which external signals (firing stop signal, frame release signal) caused by changes in the status of the firing stop operation unit 60b and the front frame 51 are output to the external device 500 is changed to the dispensing control board 110 (main board) and the external This can be easily realized by connecting to the terminal board 130.

In the third embodiment, the firing stop operation section 60b and the front frame 51 are exemplified as variable members whose states can be changed by external operations, but the variable members are not limited to these, and can be used to configure the gaming machine. Among the members (also referred to as "gaming machine component members") that can be operated by players, game hall staff, etc., and that can take at least two states depending on the operation (for example, open/close with respect to the outer frame 53) The type of the variable member does not matter as long as it is a main body frame 52, push button type or dial type switch operation part (not shown), etc., which can be provided.

Further, in the third embodiment, the external terminal board 130 is connected to the payout control board 110, but it may be connected to the main control board 80. That is, the external terminal board 130 may be connected to either one of the main control board 80 and the payout control board 110 as the main board. When the external terminal board 130 is connected to the main control board 80, the firing stop detection signal based on the detection by the firing stop switch 115t and the frame open detection signal based on the detection by the frame open detection switch 70 are connected to the payout control board 110 (main control board 110). It is possible to input the information to the external terminal board 130 via the main control board 80 (main board) without being input to the payout control microcomputer 116 (control unit). In addition, the outer end output signal (prize ball payout signal) based on the control process by the payout control microcomputer 116 (control unit) of the payout control board 110 (main board) is output from the payout control board 110 and controls the main control board 80. The signal may be input to the external terminal board 130 via the external terminal board 130. Furthermore, the external output signals (jackpot game signal, probability change signal, time saving signal, fraud detection signal) based on the control processing by the game control microcomputer 81 (control unit) of the main control board 80 (main board) are It is possible to output it from the control board 80 and input it to the external terminal board 130 without passing through the payout control board 110.

Further, in the third embodiment, the firing stop detection signal based on the detection by the firing stop switch 115t and the frame open detection signal based on the detection by the frame open detection switch 70 are input to the payout control board 110 (main board) for use in payout control. It was assumed that the signal was input to the external terminal board 130 without being controlled by the microcomputer 116 (control unit) (see FIGS. 55, 57, and 58). In contrast, a buffer IC (buffer circuit) not shown is provided on the payout control board 110 (main board), and the frame open detection signal and firing stop detection signal input to the payout control board 110 are passed through the buffer IC to the external terminal board. 130 may be input. This also allows the frame open detection signal and firing stop detection signal to be input to the external terminal board 130 without being controlled by the payout control microcomputer 116 (control unit) of the payout control board 110 (main board). It can be done. This also applies to the case where the external terminal board 130 is connected to the main control board 80 (main board). That is, by providing a buffer IC (buffer circuit) on the main control board 80 (main board) so that the detection signal input to the main control board 80 is input to the external terminal board 130 through the buffer IC, the game It is possible to input the information to the external terminal board 130 without being controlled by the control microcomputer 81 (control unit). In other words, the main board is configured so that the detection signal input to the main board (signal based on detection by the detection means (second detection means)) is input to the external terminal board without being subjected to control processing by the control unit. It can also be realized by providing a buffer IC.

In addition to the frame open detection signal and firing stop detection signal, signals output from other boards and other detection switches (for example, jackpot signal, security signal, main body frame open detection signal based on detection of opening of the main body frame 52) etc.) may be input to the external terminal board 130 without being input to the payout control board 110 (main board) and controlled by the payout control microcomputer 116 (control unit). This also applies to the case where the external terminal board 130 is connected to the main control board 80 (main board).

Further, in Embodiment 3, the external terminal board 130 was assumed to be directly connected to the payout control board 110 (main board) (see FIGS. 55, 57, and 58), but the payout control board 110 and the external terminal A relay board (not shown) may be provided between the board 130 and the external terminal board 130 to be connected (indirectly) to the dispensing control board 110 via the relay board. This also applies to the case where the external terminal board 130 is connected to the main control board 80 (main board).

Further, in the third embodiment, when the radio wave detection signal based on the detection by the radio wave sensor 70 and the magnetic detection signal from the magnetic sensor 71 are input to the main control board 80, the main control board 80 is When the fraud detection signal output from the external terminal board 130 turns on and this fraud detection signal (on) is input to the external terminal board 130 via the payout control board 110, the security signal output from the external terminal board 130 to the external device 500 The signal was assumed to be turned on (see FIG. 56(G) and FIG. 60). Regarding this, in addition to the radio wave detection signal and the magnetic detection signal, the signal that triggers the security signal to turn on (that is, the signal that triggers the fraud detection signal to turn on) includes, for example, the first starting port 20. Or a signal based on the detection of an excessive number of balls entering the second starting port 21, a signal based on the detection of a ball entering the big winning port 30 when the big winning device 31 is not activated, or a signal based on the variable winning device 22. A signal suspected of being caused by fraudulent activity may be included, such as a signal based on the detection of a ball entering the second starting port 21 when the ball is not activated. In this case, means capable of detecting excessive balls entering the starting port (first starting port 20, second starting port 21) (for example, starting port sensor and number of detections by the starting port sensor per unit time (for example, 1 second) (a counter that counts the number of winnings), a means that can detect the ball entering the big winning hole 30 when the big winning device 31 is not operating (for example, the big winning hole sensor 30a), and a means that can detect the ball entering the big winning hole 30 when the big winning device 31 is not operating, and a means that can detect the ball entering the big winning hole 30 when the variable winning device 22 is not operating. A means (for example, the second starting port sensor 21a) that can detect the ball entering the ball can also be regarded as a "fraud detection means". Excessive balls entering the starting hole, entering the big winning hole 30 when the big winning device 31 is not operating, and entering the second ball into the second starting hole 21 when the variable winning device 22 is not operating are also considered fraudulent acts. This is because it can be regarded as one aspect.

Furthermore, signals suspected of being caused by fraudulent activities, including radio wave detection signals and magnetic detection signals, are also collectively referred to as "abnormality detection signals." When the abnormality detection signal is input to the main control board 80 (main board), the abnormality detection signal is controlled and processed by the gaming control microcomputer 81 (control unit), and the signal (fraud detection signal) based on the control processing is used as the main control board. A security signal (external signal) based on the input fraud detection signal is output from the control board 80 (main board) and input to the external terminal board 130 via the payout control board 110 (main board), and is sent to the external device 500. It will be output.

Although Examples (Examples 1 to 3) have been described above as embodiments of the present invention, the present invention is not limited thereto. The present invention is not limited to the written wordings, and can be easily substituted by those skilled in the art, and can appropriately add improvements based on the knowledge commonly possessed by those skilled in the art.

For example, in the above-mentioned embodiment, regarding the preliminary determination based on the starting pitch, the latest obtained random number value (obtained information) stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is read out, and the read obtained random number value (obtained information) is determined ( However, the method of advance determination is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage section, an area (obtained information storage means) for storing the obtained information subject to preliminary determination (that is, the obtained information obtained based on the starting ball) may be stored in the main control section 80 or the sub It may be provided in the RAM of the control unit 90 to judge (preliminary judgment) the acquired information stored in the storage area (preliminary judgment storage unit). In this case, by storing the results of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit 80 or sub-control unit 90, it is also possible to erase the acquired information used for the preliminary determination (acquired information stored in a separate storage area). be.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the control process is such that the second special figure reservation is given priority to the first special figure reservation, that is, the so-called special figure 2 priority extinguishment control process, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to perform a control process of extinguishing the second special figure with priority over the second special figure reservation, a so-called control process of special figure 1 priority extinguishment. In addition, priority is not set for extinguishing the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation, and among the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation, they are consumed in order from the oldest memorized one. The control process may be a so-called control process for digesting pitches in order of arrival (order of memory). Moreover, it is good also as control processing which can perform the extinguishment of the 1st special figure reservation and the extinguishment of the 2nd special figure reservation in parallel.

In the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine of the type that determines whether to activate the probability fluctuation function based on the type of the jackpot pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko game machine of the type that has a specific area (V area) as a sure-win activation area in the big prize entrance (V attacker) and determines whether to activate the probability fluctuation function based on whether the game ball passes through the specific area (V passing) during the jackpot game (so-called "V sure machine"). Alternatively, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko game machine of the type that has a specific area (V area) in the big prize entrance that can be entered when the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is a small hit, and when the game ball that entered the big prize entrance passes through the specific area (V passing) during the small hit game, it becomes a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed based on the V passing (so-called "1 type 2 type mixed machine"). Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that circulate game balls inside the machine (so-called "enclosed game machines").

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by deactivating or activating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of the jackpot probability is It is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to set three or more types of probabilities, such as a medium probability (third probability) that is higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). good. Furthermore, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low and high probabilities are provided, and any one of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selected), for example, when the gaming machine is powered on. Good too.

[others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference invention 1)
Conventionally, gaming machines that play games using gaming media such as gaming balls and gaming medals have been known. Among these types of gaming machines, there are machines that allow so-called ``gimmicks'' that operate movable bodies (movable accessories, etc.) for performance during the game (for example, special machines). (Refer to Publication No. 2018-79117).

However, it has become commonplace for players to perform gimmick effects in modern gaming machines, and there is still room for further improvement in order to increase the interest of gaming machines equipped with gimmick effects.

The present invention 1 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to improve the interest of gaming machines equipped with gimmick effects.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, Reference Invention 1 adopted the following configuration.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
A gaming machine that plays games using predetermined gaming media,
A display screen that can display images;
a variable effect member disposed so as to be displaceable within a predetermined range in front of the display screen,
a first state in which at least a part of the variable performance member is visible when the variable performance member is located at a predetermined position within the predetermined range; and a first state in which the visibility of the at least part of the variable performance member is higher than the first state. The gist is that the second state is configured to be capable of causing a second state in which the second state becomes lower.

According to such a gaming machine, the variable effect member is movable within a predetermined range in front of the display screen on which an image can be displayed, and when the variable effect member is located at a predetermined position within the predetermined range, At least a portion of the variable effect member becomes visible (first state), or visibility of at least a portion thereof becomes low (second state). Therefore, it is possible to change not only the position of the variable effect member but also the visual state of the variable effect member at a predetermined position. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the way the performance is presented using the variable performance member and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 mentioned above,
The gist is that one or more of the predetermined positions exist within the predetermined range.

According to such a gaming machine, there is one or more predetermined positions within the predetermined range where the visible state (first state, second state) of the variable performance member that is displaced within the predetermined range can be changed. becomes. Therefore, especially when there are a plurality of predetermined positions, the effects using the variable effect member become more varied. This makes it possible to further improve interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 or 1-2 mentioned above,
The variable effect member is configured to be operable between a superimposed state in which the at least a portion overlaps with a predetermined display area of the display screen and a non-overlap state in which the at least part does not overlap with the predetermined display area. ,
In the first state, the variable effect member is in the superimposed state,
In the second state, the variable effect member is in the non-overlapping state.

According to such a gaming machine, there are a superimposed state in which at least a part of the variable effect member overlaps with a predetermined display area of the display screen, and a non-overlap state in which at least a part of the variable effect member does not overlap with a predetermined display area of the display screen. The variable effect member is enabled to operate between. In the first state in which at least a part of the variable effect member is visible, the variable effect member is in a superimposed state, so that the image displayed in the predetermined display area is hidden by the variable effect member and is on the front side of the display screen. This makes it difficult to see from the player's perspective. On the other hand, in the second state where the visibility of at least a part of the variable presentation member is lower than the first state, the variable presentation member is in a non-overlapping state, so the image displayed in the predetermined display area is hidden by the variable presentation member. First, it becomes easier to see from the front side (player side) of the display screen. Therefore, it is possible to change the visibility state of the image displayed in the predetermined display area in accordance with the state of the variable effect member. This makes it possible to further improve the interest when a performance is performed using the variable performance member.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 mentioned above,
The gist of the present invention is to include a cover member provided so as to cover the front side of the variable effect member in the non-overlapping state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the variable performance members are in the non-overlapping state, the front side of the variable performance members is covered by the cover member. Therefore, when the variable performance members are in the non-overlapping state, it is possible to make the variable performance members difficult to visually recognize from the player side. This makes it possible to give the player a visual impact when the variable effect member changes from the non-superimposed state to the superimposed state (that is, when the first state occurs).

According to the first embodiment of the present invention described above, it is possible to improve the interest of a gaming machine provided with gimmick effects.

(Reference invention 2)
Conventionally, gaming machines that play games using gaming media such as gaming balls and gaming medals have been known. Among these types of gaming machines, there are machines that allow so-called ``gimmicks'' that operate movable bodies (movable accessories, etc.) for performance during the game (for example, special machines). (Refer to Publication No. 2018-79117).

However, it has become commonplace for players to perform gimmick effects in modern gaming machines, and there is a problem in that it is becoming difficult to obtain the effects of gimmick effects.

The present invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to enhance the production effect of gimmick production.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, Reference Invention 2 adopted the following configuration.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
A variable game execution means capable of executing a variable game that displays identification information in a variable manner;
A performance control means capable of controlling the performance,
Equipped with a variable performance member that can be changed between a non-operating state and an operating state,
The performance control means is
During execution of the variable game, after activating the variable performance member in the non-operating state to bring it into the operative state, before the end of the variable game, activating the variable performance member in the operative state. a first variable production control that causes the non-operation state;
While the variable game is not being executed, after activating the variable performance member that is in the non-operating state to bring it into the operative state, the variable performance member that is in the operative state is kept in the operative state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gist is that it is possible to perform the second variable performance control to maintain the performance.

According to such a gaming machine, during execution of a variable game, after the variable effect member that is in an inactive state is activated and becomes an active state by the first variable effect control, the variable effect member is activated before the variable game ends. It becomes possible to perform a performance (gimmick performance) using a variable performance member, such as a performance member operating and returning to a non-operating state. In addition, while the variable game is not being executed, the second variable performance control activates the variable performance member that is in the inactive state and puts it into the active state, and then the variable performance member remains in the active state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to perform performances (gimmick performances) using variable performance members, such as maintaining the current level. For this reason, the variable performance member operates and enters the operating state not only during the variable game but also when the variable game is not in progress. (until it is activated). Thereby, the effect of the performance by the variable performance member can be obtained not only during the variable game but also when the variable game is not in progress, and it is possible to enhance the interest when the variable game is not in progress.

In addition, the non-operating state means the state before the variable performance member is activated, that is, the state in which the performance by the variable performance member is not performed, and the operating state is the state after the variable performance member is activated (when activated). In other words, it means a state in which the performance by the variable performance member is executed (a state in which the performance by the variable performance member is not completed).

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 mentioned above,
Equipped with a display screen that can display staged images,
The variable effect member is configured to be located in front of the display screen at least when in the actuated state,
When the variable effect member is brought into the operating state by the first variable effect control, a specific effect image is displayed on the display screen;
The gist is that the specific effect image is not displayed on the display screen while the variable effect member is maintained in the operating state by the second variable effect control.

According to such a gaming machine, when the variable performance member is in the operating state, the variable performance member is located in front of the display screen, so that at least a part of the display screen is covered by the variable performance member. Then, when the variable performance member is brought into operation by the first variable performance control (that is, during execution of a variable game), a specific performance image is displayed on the display screen, so that the variable performance member that is activated and the display screen This enables a synergistic effect with the specific effect image displayed on the screen. On the other hand, while the variable performance member is maintained in the operating state by the second variable performance control (that is, while the variable game is not being executed), the specific performance image is not displayed on the display screen, so the variable performance that is maintained in the active state is not displayed on the display screen. It is possible to make the parts look simple. This makes it possible to perform performances suitable for both the execution and non-execution of the variable game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or 2-2 described above,
a driving means for operating the variable performance member;
a drive control means capable of controlling the drive of the drive means;
Current value reducing means capable of reducing the current value of the current supplied to the driving means,
The drive control means includes:
configured to be able to supply a specific current smaller than a predetermined drive current to the drive means,
While the variable effect member is maintained in the operating state by the second variable effect control, the drive of the drive means is stopped and the drive means is controlled to a stopped energized state in which the drive means is energized. and
The gist of the current value reducing means is to reduce the current value of the current supplied to the driving means in the stopped energization state to less than the current value of the specific current.

According to such a gaming machine, the drive control means capable of controlling the drive of the drive means for operating the variable performance member is configured to be able to supply a specific current smaller than a predetermined drive current to the drive means, Further, while the variable performance member is maintained in the operating state by the second variable performance control, it is possible to control the drive means to a stopped energization state by stopping the driving of the drive means and energizing the drive means. With this configuration, in the stopped energization state, the current value of the current supplied to the drive means is reduced to less than the current value of the specific current by the current value reduction means. Therefore, while the variable performance member is maintained in the operating state by the second variable performance control (while the variable game is not being executed), it is in the stopped energized state, and the current supplied to the drive means during that time is supplied by the drive control means. It is even smaller than the possible specific current. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance by the variable performance member and to minimize the amount of current consumed while the variable game is not being executed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 mentioned above,
The gist of the current value reducing means is to reduce the current value of the current supplied to the driving means in the stopped energization state to less than half of the current value of the specific current.

According to such a gaming machine, the current value of the current supplied to the driving means in the stopped energization state is reduced by the current value reducing means to less than half of the current value of the specific current. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the current value of the current supplied to the driving means while the variable performance member is maintained in the operating state by the second variable performance control. This makes it possible to further reduce the current consumed while the variable game is not being executed.

According to the second embodiment of the present invention described above, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the gimmick performance (the performance using the variable performance member).

(Reference invention 3)
Conventionally, gaming machines that play games using gaming media such as gaming balls and gaming medals have been known. This type of gaming machine is equipped with an external terminal board that is connected to an external device (for example, a hall computer) installed in the hall where the gaming machine is installed, and the signal input to the external terminal board is Based on this, various signals (information) related to the gaming status and the like are output to an external device (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217726).

Gaming machines have specifications such as so-called 1 type, 2 type, 1 type and 2 mixed type, and general electric role type. In addition, the so-called type 1 type gaming machine has a pattern changing machine that determines whether or not to move to a variable probability gaming state based on the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed, and a pattern changing machine that determines whether or not to move to a variable probability gaming state based on the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed, and a pattern changing machine that determines whether or not to move to a variable probability gaming state based on the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. There are specifications such as a V-probability machine in which it is determined whether or not to shift to a probability-variable gaming state based on the presence or absence of the game. As described above, the specifications of gaming machines vary widely, and depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, it is possible to output a predetermined signal different from existing signals to an external device. In this case, it is desirable to be able to respond as simply as possible in the development and manufacturing process of the gaming machine.

Reference invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can easily handle the case where a predetermined signal different from the existing signal is output to an external device. be.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the present reference invention 3 adopted the following configuration.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
a main board provided with a control unit capable of executing control processing that affects the result of the game;
An external terminal board capable of outputting a predetermined external signal to an external device provided outside the gaming machine,
A gaming machine configured such that an external signal based on a signal input to the external terminal board is output from the external terminal board to the external device,
Equipped with a detection means capable of detecting a predetermined event,
A signal based on control processing by the control unit and a signal based on detection by the detection means can be input to the external terminal board,
A signal based on control processing by the control unit is configured to be output from the main board and input to the external terminal board,
The gist is that a signal based on detection by the detection means is input to the external terminal board via the main board.

According to such a gaming machine, a signal based on control processing by a control unit provided on the main board and a signal based on detection by a detection means capable of detecting a predetermined event can be input to the external terminal board. External signals based on those signals input to the external terminal board can be output to an external device. Under such a configuration, signals based on control processing by the control section of the main board are output from the main board and input to the external terminal board, while signals based on detection by the detection means are sent via the main board. Input to external terminal board. Therefore, a signal that triggers the output of an external signal to an external device, that is, a signal that is input to the external terminal board, always passes through the main board. Therefore, regardless of the source of the signal that triggers the output of an external signal to the external device, the connection between the main board and the external terminal board makes it possible to output various external signals to the external device. This makes it possible to easily cope with the case where, for example, a configuration is adopted in which an external signal caused by a predetermined event (detected by the detection means) is output to an external device as a signal different from an existing signal.

Note that the predetermined event is, for example, an event that occurs due to an artificial operation or action by a person who uses (plays) or manages a gaming machine (player, gaming hall clerk, etc.); Events that occur related to the configuration (structure) and operation of the gaming machine, such as events that occur due to the operation of the parts and devices included in the gaming machine, and events that occur as a result of the game process. It is an event whose presence or absence (occurrence or not) can be recognized (detected).

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 mentioned above,
The detection means includes a first detection means capable of detecting a predetermined first event and a second detection means capable of detecting a predetermined second event,
A signal based on the detection by the first detection means is input to the main board and subjected to control processing by the control unit, and a signal based on the control processing is output from the main board and input to the external terminal board. It is configured as follows.
The signal based on the detection by the second detection means is configured to be input to the external terminal board via the main board without being input to the main board and subjected to control processing by the control unit. The gist is that.

According to such a gaming machine, a signal based on detection by the first detection means capable of detecting a predetermined first event is input to the main board and subjected to control processing by the control section, and the signal based on the control processing is inputted to the main board. It is output from the main board and input to the external terminal board. On the other hand, the signal based on the detection by the second detection means capable of detecting a predetermined second event is input to the external terminal board via the main board without being input to the main board and subjected to control processing by the control unit. . Therefore, the external signal caused by the second event (detected by the second detection means) can be output to the external device without affecting the control processing of the control section of the main board. This suppresses an increase in the control processing burden on the main board for controlling external signals caused by the first event (detected by the first detection means) and external signals caused by the second event (detected by the second detection means). It becomes possible to output to an external device while doing so.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 mentioned above,
The gist is that the first detection means is a fraud detection means capable of detecting fraud.

According to such a gaming machine, the first detection means capable of detecting a predetermined first event is constituted by a fraud detection means capable of detecting a fraudulent act. In other words, the predetermined first event to be detected by the first detection means is considered to be a fraudulent act. Then, the signal based on the detection by the fraud detection means is input to the main board and is controlled and processed by the control unit, and the signal based on the control process is output from the main board and input to the external terminal board. An external signal based on the signal is output to an external device. This makes it possible to easily realize a configuration in which an external signal caused by fraudulent activity is output to an external device by connecting the main board and the external terminal board.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 or 3-3 mentioned above,
comprising a variable member that can be changed between a first state and a second state by external operation;
The gist is that the second detection means is a state detection means capable of detecting a change in the state of the variable member.

According to such a gaming machine, the variable member that can be changed between the first state and the second state by an external operation is provided, and the second detection means capable of detecting a predetermined second event is It is constituted by a state detection means capable of detecting a change in state of the variable member. In other words, the predetermined second event to be detected by the second detection means is a change in the state of the variable member. Then, the signal based on the detection by the state detection means is input to the main board and is input to the external terminal board via the main board without being controlled and processed by the control unit, and the external signal based on the input signal is input to the external terminal board. It will now be output to an external device. This makes it possible to easily realize a configuration in which an external signal caused by a change in the state of the variable member is output to an external device by connecting the main board and the external terminal board.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is
a game control board provided with a game control unit capable of executing control processing related to the progress of the game;
a payout control board provided with a payout control unit capable of executing control processing related to payout of game media;
An external terminal board capable of outputting a predetermined external signal to an external device provided outside the gaming machine,
A gaming machine configured such that an external signal based on a signal input to the external terminal board is output from the external terminal board to the external device,
Equipped with a detection means capable of detecting a predetermined event,
A signal based on control processing by the game control section, a signal based on control processing by the payout control section, and a signal based on detection by the detection means can be input to the external terminal board,
A signal based on control processing by the game control unit is configured to be output from the game control board and input to the external terminal board via the payout control board,
A signal based on control processing by the payout control unit is configured to be output from the payout control board and input to the external terminal board,
The gist is that a signal based on detection by the detection means is configured to be input to the external terminal board via the payout control board.

According to such a gaming machine, a signal based on the control process by the game control unit provided on the game control board, a signal based on the control process by the payout control unit provided on the payout control board, and a predetermined event are detected. Signals based on detection by possible detection means can be input to the external terminal board, and external signals based on those signals input to the external terminal board can be output to an external device. Under such a configuration, the signal based on the control process by the game control unit is output from the game control board and input to the external terminal board via the payout control board, and the signal based on the control process by the payout control unit is A signal output from the payout control board and input to the external terminal board, and based on detection by the detection means, is input to the external terminal board via the payout control board. Therefore, the signal that triggers the output of an external signal to the external device, that is, the signal that is input to the external terminal board, always passes through the payout control board. Therefore, regardless of the source of the signal that triggers the output of an external signal to the external device, it is possible to output various external signals to the external device by connecting the payout control board and the external terminal board. This makes it possible to easily cope with the case where, for example, a configuration is adopted in which an external signal caused by a predetermined event (detected by the detection means) is output to an external device as a signal different from an existing signal.

According to the third embodiment of the present invention described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily handle the case where a predetermined signal different from an existing signal is output to an external device.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Play area, 4 Rail member, 7 Image display device, 7a Display screen, 7b Production pattern display area, 7c Judgment pattern display area, 8 Production pattern, 8s Judgment pattern, 9a First production Hold, 9b Second performance hold, 9c First performance hold display area, 9d Second performance hold display area, 9e Variable hold display area, 10 Center decoration body, 13 Decoration member, 14 Variable performance member, 14L Left variable performance member, 14R Right variable performance member, 16 Game nail, 17 Cover member, 17L Left cover member, 17R Right cover member, 19 Fixed winning device, 20 First starting port, 21 Second starting port, 22 Variable winning device, 28 Gate, 30 Big prize opening, 31 Big winning device, 40 Main display, 41a 1st special symbol display, 41b 2nd special symbol display, 50 Gaming machine frame, 51 Front frame, 52 Main body frame, 53 Outer frame, 60 Launch handle , 60a rotation operation section, 60b firing stop operation section, 63a first production button, 63b second production button, 66 frame lamp, 67 speaker, 70 frame open detection switch, 71 radio wave sensor, 72 magnetic sensor, 80 main control board , 81 Game control microcomputer, 90 Sub-control board, 91 Production control microcomputer, 100 Image control board, 101 Image control microcomputer, 108 Relay board, 110 Payout control board, 111 Launch control board, 112 Launch device, 113 Launch motor , 114 touch switch, 115 firing volume, 115t firing stop switch, 116 dispensing control microcomputer, 120 dispensing device, 121 dispensing motor, 122 dispensing sensor, 123 dispensing sensor, 130 external terminal board, 140 variable production unit, 150 preview image, 200 variable performance member, 200a movable body, 200b movable body, 200c movable body, 210 current value reduction circuit, 500 external device.

Claims (1)

a main board provided with a control unit capable of executing control processing that affects the result of the game;
An external terminal board capable of outputting a predetermined external signal to an external device provided outside the gaming machine,
A gaming machine configured such that an external signal based on a signal input to the external terminal board is output from the external terminal board to the external device,
Equipped with a detection means capable of detecting a predetermined event,
A gaming machine characterized in that a signal based on control processing by the control unit and a signal based on detection by the detection means can be input to the external terminal board.

Images